Canon imagePROGRAF iPF6450 Скачать руководство пользователя | Manualshive

Страница: 690 / 1066

background image

Erasure Method

Details

Secure High Spd.

Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. No verification is performed to check if the data was correctly
written. Choose this method to erase highly confidential data. Note that it may be possible to read the overwrit-
ten data using specialized data recovery tools.

Secure

Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data (one time each). Verification is performed to check
if the data was correctly written. Choose this method to erase especially confidential data. It is virtually impossi-
ble to recover the overwritten data. Conforms to the DoD5220.22-M standard of the U.S. Department of De-
fense.

Important

•

For a more secure method of preventing data recovery, we recommend physically or magnetically destroying the hard disk.
In this case, the hard disk can no longer be used.

•

Erase HDD Data

is not available if there is a job queue.

Additionally, print jobs are not processed during execution of

Erase HDD Data

.

1

On the

Tab Selection screen

of the Control Panel, press

◀

or

▶

to se-

lect the Settings/Adj. tab (

).

Note

•

If the

Tab Selection screen

is not displayed, press the

Menu

button.

2

Press the

OK

button.

The

Set./Adj. Menu

is displayed.

3

Press

▲

or

▼

to select

System Setup

, and then press the

OK

button.

4

Press

▲

or

▼

to select

Erase HDD Data

, and then press the

OK

button.

5

Press

▲

or

▼

to select

High Speed

,

Secure High Spd.

, or

Secure

, and then press the

OK

button to display

the confirmation screen.

Note

•

If a password has been set on the printer, the

Admin.Pswd

screen is displayed. In this case, enter the password

and press the

OK

button to go to the next step.

•

As for the time required for deletion, confirm it on the Control Panel. However, when

High Speed

is selected, this

finishes in several seconds.

6

Press

▲

or

▼

to select

Yes

, and then press the

OK

button to start erasure.

After the printer hard disk is erased, the printer automatically restarts.

Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk

iPF6450

User's Guide

Printer Parts

Hard Disk

690

«
...
688
689
690
691
692
...
»

Содержание imagePROGRAF iPF6450

Страница 1: ... OS X Software 361 Printer Driver 362 Preview 386 Free Layout 414 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 445 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 462 Layout Plug In for Photoshop 520 and so on Handling and Use of Paper 525 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Cons...

Страница 2: ...rted from the HTML format instruction manual included on the User Manuals CD ROM supplied with the printer Thus there are descriptions that are applied only in HTML format and functions video display function etc that cannot be used We appreciate your understanding 2 ...

Страница 3: ... RGB Images Mac OS X 48 Printing Office Documents 50 Printing Office Documents Windows 50 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X 52 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals 54 Adjusting Images 56 Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver 56 Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Windows 58 Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Mac OS X 60 Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for...

Страница 4: ... Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows 125 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Mac OS X 127 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously 128 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Windows 128 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Mac OS X 130 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet 132 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows 132 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X 134 Printing Posters i...

Страница 5: ...rmation on Printer Dialog Box 189 Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box 189 View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application 191 Color Adjustment Sheet Color 191 Object Adjustment Dialog box Color 193 Matching Sheet 193 Color Adjustment Sheet Monochrome 196 Object Adjustment Dialog box Monochrome 197 Gray Adjustment Sheet 198 Page Setup Sheet 199 Output Method Dialog box 202 Paper Size Options D...

Страница 6: ...cifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder 250 Setting the Print Parameters 253 Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER 253 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 255 Features of the Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 256 Installation Procedures 256 Uninstall Procedures 259 Starting from Photoshop 259 Starting from Digital Phot...

Страница 7: ...Print Preferences 310 Delete Print History from Print Preferences 312 Set Information to Print with Image 313 Layout Plug In for Photoshop 315 About the Layout Plug In 315 Layout Plug In Main Window 315 Add Canvas Size dialog box 317 Creating and Printing a Layout Image for Mounting on a Frame 318 Print Plug In for Office 320 Print Plug In for Office features 320 Steps to install 321 Steps to unin...

Страница 8: ... Utility Pane 383 Additional Settings Pane 384 Support Pane 384 Preview 386 The Features of Preview 386 Starting Preview 386 Preview Main Window 388 Paper Settings Panel 391 Easy Settings 393 Advanced Settings 394 Output Settings Panel 396 Color Settings Panel 398 Color Adjustment 399 Gray Adjustment 402 Matching 403 Driver Matching Mode 406 ICC Matching Mode 407 ColorSync 408 Preferences Dialog B...

Страница 9: ... Hot Folder 448 Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions 449 Deleting a Hot Folder 451 Setting the Print Parameters 452 Paper Settings Panel 452 Easy Settings 454 Advanced Settings 455 Output Settings Panel 456 Color Settings Panel 458 Driver Matching Mode 459 ICC Matching Mode 460 Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER 460 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Phot...

Страница 10: ...09 Utilize Print History 509 Confirm Print History Details 510 Apply Print History to an Image 511 Store Print History to Print Preferences 511 Delete Print History 513 Export Print History from Print Preferences 514 Import Print History to Print Preferences 515 Delete Print History from Print Preferences 517 Set Information to Print with Image 518 Layout Plug In for Photoshop 520 About the Layout...

Страница 11: ...ames 581 Deleting Media Types You Have Added 583 Switching Media Types Display Show Hide 585 Changing the Display Order of Media Types 586 Using Paper Other than Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper 588 Compatible Paper 590 Add Custom Paper 591 Delete Custom Paper 597 Edit Custom Paper 598 Export Custom Media Information 599 Import Custom Media Information 600 Create Calibration Target 601 Warni...

Страница 12: ...inting Interface Setting Reports 676 Printer Parts Printer Parts 679 Printer parts 680 Front 680 Back 681 Top Cover Inside 682 Paper Feed Slots 683 Inside the Roll Feed Unit Cover 684 Carriage 684 Ink Tank Cover Inside 685 Vents 686 Hard Disk 687 Printer Hard Disk Operations 687 Checking the Free Hard Disk Space 688 Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk 689 Optional accessories 691 Stand 691 Sta...

Страница 13: ...Configuring the Communication Mode Manually 725 Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur 726 Initializing the Network Settings 726 Device Setup Utility Windows 727 imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 727 Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 727 Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 727 Print Job Management Print Job Management 731 Status Monit...

Страница 14: ...of Saved Jobs 786 Renaming Saved Jobs 789 Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Adjustment for high precision printing 794 Enhancing Printing Quality 794 Adjusting the Printhead 796 Adjusting the Printhead 796 Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors 796 Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors 798 Adjustment When Installing the Printhead ...

Страница 15: ...easurement Data For Any Color Chart 866 Executing Color Check 873 Registering Execution Logs in Favorites 878 Deleting Execution Logs From Favorites 879 Saving Execution Logs on the Computer 880 Switching Display Units 881 Getting Audio Notification of Color Calibration Finished 881 Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 883 Features of Color Calibration Management Console 883 Installation ...

Страница 16: ...e Printer 954 Preparing to Transfer the Printer 960 Updating the Firmware 965 Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option 965 Consumables 972 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 973 Frequently Asked Questions 974 Frequently Asked Questions 974 Problems Regarding Paper 976 Clearing Jammed Paper Paper Feed Slot 976 Clearing Jammed Roll Paper 977 Clearing a Jammed Sheet Fe...

Страница 17: ...monochrome 996 Line thickness is not uniform 996 Lines or colors are misaligned 996 Borders appear during borderless printing 997 Spectrophotometer Trouble Shooting 998 Acquiring color measurement data takes a long time 998 Measurement results are unusual suspect 998 You cannot execute AutoAdjst HiPrc from the computer 998 Cannot print over a network 999 Cannot connect the printer to the network 9...

Страница 18: ...following ink tanks cannot be recognized 1020 Do not pull out ink tank 1020 Messages regarding printing or adjustment 1021 Cannot execute this command Use other paper 1021 Cannot print as specified 1021 Cannot calibrate 1022 Excessive temperature or humidity 1022 Please execute common calibration 1022 Please commn calibrt using above paper 1022 Please calibrate using above paper 1022 Before border...

Страница 19: ...essages 1031 GARO Wxxxx x represents a number 1031 ERROR Exxx xxxx x represents a letter or number 1031 Hardware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number 1031 Prepare for parts replacement 1032 Parts replacement time has passed 1032 Unknown file 1032 Calibration There is a problem with the multi sensor 1032 Multi sensor error 1032 Specifications Specifications 1033 Printer Specification...

Страница 20: ...20 ...

Страница 21: ...dows Software 175 Mac OS X Software 361 Handling and Use of Paper 525 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Basic Printing Workflow 21 ...

Страница 22: ...rosoft Office applications See Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing P 111 Borderless printing Print without a margin border around posters or photos See Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size P 98 See Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 104 See Borderless Printing at Actual Size P 91 Banner printing You can print multiple pages as a s...

Страница 23: ...ext to Each Other P 124 Turning the Printer On and Off Turning the Printer On and Off Turning the printer on 1 Press the Power button to turn on the printer The printer will now start up After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo Starting up Please wait is displayed 2 The Power Lamp is lit when the printer finishes starting up and the printer is now in Standby The printer will not go into Stand...

Страница 24: ...me time To prevent this disconnect the USB cable before starting the printer Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue Turning the printer off Important Never disconnect the printer s power supply or unplug it during a print job This may damage the printer 1 Make sure no print jobs are in progress If the Message Lamp is flashing check the message on the Display Scre...

Страница 25: ...ut before printing Before printing banners or other long documents tap the Output Stacker We recommend that you spread a clean cloth or paper on the floor and select Eject as the cutting method for rolls to prevent the printed surface from becoming dirty or scratched See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 546 Note For details on supported sizes and types of rolls see Paper Sizes or the Pape...

Страница 26: ...e Roll Holder See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 3 Load the roll in the printer See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Loading and Printing on Rolls iPF6450 User s Guide Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure 26 ...

Страница 27: ...r P 538 Note If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On specify the roll length after the type of paper See Specifying the Paper Length P 540 5 Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver Windows P 178 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver Mac OS X P 364 iPF6450 Loading and Printing ...

Страница 28: ...on sheets Note For details on supported types and sizes of paper see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Sizes P 526 See Types of Paper P 526 Borderless printing is not supported on sheets For the features and the main printing methods available for sheet printing see Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets P 22 1 Turn the printer on See Turning the Printer On and Off P 23 2 Complet...

Страница 29: ...Windows Printing in Windows Print from the application menu Important We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality 1 In the source application select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions iPF6450 Printing in Windows User s Guide Basi...

Страница 30: ...ee Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu P 185 Printing from Mac OS X Printing from Mac OS X Print from the application menu after registering the printer Important We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality Registering the printer Bef...

Страница 31: ...he following illustration you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing including enlarged and re duced printing borderless printing and so on iPF6450 Printing from Mac OS X User s Guide Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure 31 ...

Страница 32: ...u press the Stop button during printing printer operation varies depending on the current status If you press the Stop button before printing starts Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a confirmation message To cancel the print job select Yes If you press the Stop button during printing Pressing the Stop button during printing will display a confirmation message To cancel ...

Страница 33: ...the job to cancel and select Cancel 3 If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window that is if the print data has already been received by the printer double click the taskbar icon to display imagePROGRAF Status Monitor 4 On the Printer Status sheet click Cancel Job Note The screen may differ slightly depending on the model you are using Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X Canceling Print...

Страница 34: ... print data is sent to the printer even if the computer has started preparing the print data 1 Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window 2 Click Pause Printer to stop printing 3 If there are no jobs in the printer window that can be canceled that is if the print data has already been sent to the printer click Utility to display imagePROG RAF Printmonitor 4 Select the print j...

Страница 35: ...ROGRAF Printmonitor In the printer window click Resume Printer Important Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor If you do not restart job pro cessing the next job cannot be printed iPF6450 Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X User s Guide Basic Printing Workflow Canceling print jobs 35 ...

Страница 36: ...ing cases the status is cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off and printing from the job queue re sumes When paper is advanced When you execute Chg Paper Type in the Paper Menu 1 During printing on the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is disp...

Страница 37: ...1 Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 124 Centering originals 141 Conserving roll paper 151 Checking Images Before Printing 161 Other useful settings 162 Windows Software 175 Mac OS X Software 361 Handling and Use of Paper 525 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 91...

Страница 38: ...rence Guide An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the media type specified in the printer driver does not match the media type specified in the printer Although you can print under these conditions the printing results may not be suitable Genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper For genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper select the settings that are opti...

Страница 39: ...setting Poster An optimal setting for posters Print in vivid colors with impact and high saturation Faithful Color Reproduction Print with minimum color difference Suitable for printing scanner im ages and when print results are too vivid Photo Adobe RGB Setting suitable for printing images created using the color space of Adobe RGB in optimal color Important Depending on the Media Type setting so...

Страница 40: ...ded In this case click Canon Premium Glossy Paper 2 280 In the AMedia Type choose the type of paper used for printing such as Glossy Paper Canon Coated Pa per and so on Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer Note The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software as well as on the Control Panel is updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User S...

Страница 41: ...s see Printer Driver Settings P 176 11 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For instructions on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Printing Photos and Images Mac OS X Printing Photos and Images Mac OS X This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example Document Photo image from a digital camera Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm P...

Страница 42: ...he up per part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 10 x12 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access t...

Страница 43: ...Color in the EPrint Target list Note For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images see Printing Photos and Images P 39 You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list 11 Make sure the width of the ...

Страница 44: ...ge Some of the settings and customizations available in the plug in are as follows Automatic detection of the color space sRGB or Adobe RGB for automatic selection of the optimal profile This feature eliminates the need to complete intricate settings when printing Adobe RGB images Advanced gray adjustment including adjustment of tone curves in addition to an array of standard adjust ments for colo...

Страница 45: ...m Important In Photoshop select no color matching In the printer driver settings select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space 1 In Photoshop create an image in the Adobe RGB color space Note The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS3 CS4 CS5 For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images refer to the Photoshop documentation 2 Choose Print with Preview from...

Страница 46: ... the EPrint Priority list 11 Select the print quality in the FPrint Quality list Note Options displayed in the FPrint Quality list vary depending on the paper type 12 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 13 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents 46 ...

Страница 47: ... Setup sheet 19 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the source application In this case click 10 x12 20 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 21 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list In this case click 10 in Roll 254 0mm and then click OK iPF6450 Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options ...

Страница 48: ...river Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space 1 In Photoshop create an image in the Adobe RGB color space Note The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS3 CS4 CS5 For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images refer to the Photoshop documentation 2 Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box 3 Make sure the setting mode is Color...

Страница 49: ...paper 11 Click Color in the HColor Mode list 12 Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box 13 Click Matching to display the Matching pane 14 In Matching Mode click Driver Matching Mode 15 In Color Space click Adobe RGB 16 Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box 17 Access the Page Setup pane iPF6450 Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing ...

Страница 50: ...ffice Document Setting optimized for printing general office documents such as ma terials for distribution so that they can be viewed easily Note You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings You can also fine tune these values as needed Advanced Settings For details on Advanced Settings refer to Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Prin...

Страница 51: ...In this case click Plain Paper 5 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click Office Document in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView Settings 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 7 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO...

Страница 52: ...r Size Note The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the set tings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the up per part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu ...

Страница 53: ...Office Document in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Click Manual in the APaper Source list iPF6450 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents 53 ...

Страница 54: ...ist to Compose Originals You can print a variety of source documents from word processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications creating a poster layout for printing 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in t...

Страница 55: ...t the document will not be printed yet 8 Choose the page to load in PosterArtist 9 Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired Without closing the PosterArtist window repeat steps 1 8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page Note For details on how to edit and sort images refer to the PosterArtist Manual 10 Print from the PosterArtist menu iPF6450 Usi...

Страница 56: ...orming color matching in the printer driver You can adjust the color balance 1 If No color correction is selected the Matching sheet Matching pane is not displayed Color Adjustment You can adjust colors separately for images graphics and text documents Adjustment Item Description Cyan Fine tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan Magenta and Yellow Magenta Yellow Gray Tone Adjust the grays...

Страница 57: ... to use mode when performing color adjustment using ap plication software Perceptual People Dark Areas Color matching optimized for printing sub dued photos such as indoor shots of people or dark scenes Along with preventing the gradation loss of dark areas you can realize photos of people in warm tones Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input col...

Страница 58: ...application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 183 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 5 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 6 Click Color in the GColor Mode list Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and ...

Страница 59: ...r from the list HBrightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation in a range from subdued to vivid Note Click Object Adjus...

Страница 60: ... This topic describes how to fine tune the color tone of photos before printing 1 This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size Note The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the set tings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are co...

Страница 61: ...to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 7 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 8 Click Color in the HColor Mode list iPF6450 Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images 61 ...

Страница 62: ...st HBrightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation in a range from subdued to vivid Note Click Object Adjustment to open...

Страница 63: ... quality may not be sufficient when printing photos or images that require a lot of color coverage In this case choose Image instead Office Document Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics such as docu ments and presentation material created with typical office applications Proof This is a setting for enhancing the reproduction of text illustrations and p...

Страница 64: ...lor Mode only Brightness and Contrast can be adjus ted Color Adjustment Graphics Color Adjustment Text Gray Adjustment Color Balance Brightness Contrast Highlight Shadow Choose the gray tone color balance Cool Black or Warm Black and adjust levels of brightness contrast highlight and shadow as desired These levels can be adjusted when Mono chrome Photo is selected in Color Mode Color Matching Mode...

Страница 65: ...osing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Mac OS X P 67 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Windows Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Windows You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets This topic describes how print photo graphic images in monochrome 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialo...

Страница 66: ...e in the GColor Mode list 9 To adjust the brightness and contrast click HColor Settings Note For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 56 10 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 11 Confirm the settings of APage Size LPaper Source and so on Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Windows iPF6450 User s Guide ...

Страница 67: ...sets This topic describes how print photo graphic images in monochrome 1 Choose Page Setup from the application menu to dis play the Page Attributes dialog box 2 Select the printer in the BFormat for list 3 Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list 4 Click FOK to close the dialog box 5 In the application menu choose Print 6 Access the Main pane 7 In the AMedia Type list select the type of p...

Страница 68: ...ype 11 Click Monochrome in the HColor Mode list 12 To adjust the brightness and contrast click ISet Note For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 56 13 Access the Page Setup pane 14 Confirm the settings of APaper Source and CPage Size Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Optio...

Страница 69: ...n click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 iPF6450 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images 69 ...

Страница 70: ... to match the paper size refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Windows P 70 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X P 72 Note For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format use an image editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify a...

Страница 71: ...er Source list 8 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm 9 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 10 Select the CEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 11 Select the DFit Paper Size check box 12 Click ISO A3 in the GPaper Size list iPF6450 Resizing Originals to Match ...

Страница 72: ...epending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the set tings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the up per part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 I...

Страница 73: ...7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list iPF6450 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions 73 ...

Страница 74: ...ed Reduced Printing check box 14 Make sure EFit Paper Size is selected 15 Click ISO A3 in the IPaper Size list 16 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging o...

Страница 75: ...pecify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width based on the following example Document Any type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm Letter 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width 16 inche...

Страница 76: ...et list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 7 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 8 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 or Letter 8 5 x11 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions 76 ...

Страница 77: ... of the loaded roll 11 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 21...

Страница 78: ...2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain ...

Страница 79: ... printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the origi nal size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page At tributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Click FFit Roll Paper Width 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 iPF...

Страница 80: ...n image editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Windows Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Windows This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value based on the following exam ple Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0...

Страница 81: ... paper in the LPaper Source list 8 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm 9 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 10 Select the CEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 11 Click ISO A4 in the GPaper Size list iPF6450 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Win...

Страница 82: ... settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value based on the following exam ple Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 i...

Страница 83: ...elect the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Pap...

Страница 84: ...ter is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the origi nal size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page At tributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing...

Страница 85: ... the paper size the original is printed in the upper left corner In this case you can center originals by selecting the JPrint Centered check box 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 iPF6450 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Pr...

Страница 86: ... printing is performed by taking the margins necessary for printer opera tions outside of the region of the original to give the result as shown in Figure c The A4 size print as shown in Figure b can then be obtained by trimming the margins from the periphery after printing Important When printing on Oversize paper load paper larger than the page size a size that includes the margin required by th...

Страница 87: ...y Type Page Size A4 210 0 297 0 mm Letter 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 183 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select t...

Страница 88: ...d roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Printing at Full Size Mac OS X Printing at Full Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example Oversized Printing Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 2...

Страница 89: ...on software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In FPaper Size click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 Oversize 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this ...

Страница 90: ...Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure CPage Size shows the original size as specified in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dia log box in this case ISO A4 Oversize Printing at Full Size Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size 90...

Страница 91: ...rformed in the printer driver Important When printing without borders be certain to set the blue switch on the platen to the side If the switch is set incorrectly print quality may deteriorate See Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen P 992 Borderless printing is not possible if details such as crop marks and margins are included as data on the periphery of the original If the length of the image ...

Страница 92: ...o not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing Important When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be uneven at the edges If you require higher image quality select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options dialog box In this case the paper can be printed without borders o...

Страница 93: ...and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut depending on frequency of use In this kind of situation change the ink drying time using the following procedure Click Advanced Settings in Media Type Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time 7 Click the Page Setup tab to displ...

Страница 94: ... roll for borderless printing insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Hold er See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 The platen may be soiled from borderless printing if you do not attach it Important When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be uneven at the edges If you require higher image quality select No from...

Страница 95: ... for borderless printing are indicated by Borderless 4 Click FOK to close the dialog box 5 In the application create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size 6 Choose Print in the application menu 7 Access the Main pane 8 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Canon Heavyweight Coat ed Paper iPF6450 Borderless Printing at Actual Size ...

Страница 96: ...ween Pages in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box 10 Access the Page Setup pane 11 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list 12 Confirm that the roll paper width matches the paper size Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll Width list in this case 10 in 254 0mm Note If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information...

Страница 97: ...tes dialog box in this case 10 x12 Border less 14 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 iPF6450 Borderless Printing at Actual Size Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size 97 ...

Страница 98: ...er Reference Guide pa per where printed image areas cannot be cut cleanly is selected When the following settings are made in the printer control panel Cutting Mode is Manual CutDustReduct is On When auto cut is configured as not performed in the printer driver Important When printing without borders be certain to set the blue switch on the platen to the side If the switch is set incorrectly print...

Страница 99: ...r P 533 If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing Important When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be uneven at the edges If you require higher image quality select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options dialog box In this case the paper can be printed w...

Страница 100: ...t that is cut depending on frequency of use In this kind of situation change the ink drying time using the following procedure Click Advanced Settings in Media Type Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time 7 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 8 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In th...

Страница 101: ... an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing Important When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be uneven at the edges If you ...

Страница 102: ... originals to match the paper size 4 Click FOK to close the dialog box 5 In the application create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size 6 Choose Print in the application menu 7 Access the Main pane 8 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Canon Heavyweight Coat ed Paper Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper ...

Страница 103: ...ng time in Between Pages in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box 10 Access the Page Setup pane 11 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list 12 Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll Width list in this case 10 in 254 0mm Note If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane and update the printer in...

Страница 104: ... the original With borderless printing you can print documents without the margin so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper Borderless printing is only available with rolls Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths See Paper Reference Guide Although it normally prints borderless on the top bottom left ...

Страница 105: ...ll be printed by automatically rotating the page by 90 degrees Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original as desired Scale to fit Roll Paper Width Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width Note You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width relative to portrait orientation matches the roll ...

Страница 106: ...n 2 Choose Print in the application menu 3 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 183 4 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 5 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Canon Heavyweight Coat ed Paper 6 Select the print target in the EPrint Target l...

Страница 107: ... 11 Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list in this case click 10 in Roll 254 0mm 12 Click OK to close the Information dialog box 13 In CBorderless Printing Method make sure EScale to fit Roll Paper Width is selected 14 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 iPF6450 Borderless Printing ...

Страница 108: ... Paper Detailed Settings dialog box In this case the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only Once printed and cut please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors Document Any type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm Letter 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Canon Heavyweight Coated Paper Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 Choose Page Setup from the application menu to di...

Страница 109: ...Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut depending on frequency of use In this kind of situation change the ink drying time in Between Pages in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box 10 Access the Page Setup pane 11 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list iPF6450 Borderless Printing by Resizing Origin...

Страница 110: ...n the Page At tributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 14 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 15 Select the HBorderless Printing check box This ensures that FFit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in DEnlarged Reduced Printing 16 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 Borde...

Страница 111: ...oll Paper Width To match the width of vertical and horizontal banners with the width of rolls use the printer driver function for automati cally enlarging reducing and printing For example if you automatically enlarge a document created with application software such as Microsoft Word you can print the full width of the roll easily For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners refer ...

Страница 112: ...r with Custom Paper Size Once you register Custom Paper Size you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list Custom Paper Size can be set up to 18 0 m 2 In the application create an original in the size you registered 3 Print the banner using the settings that correspond to banners Registering a Custom Paper Size This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally e...

Страница 113: ...aper Size click the Custom Paper Size you registered My Horizontal Banner in this example Important If My Horizontal Banner is not listed make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes use the cus tom paper size setting in Custom and specify 100 500 mm 3 9 19 7 in 4 Set the printing orien...

Страница 114: ...sy Settings is selected click Poster in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 7 In the APage Size list click the size you registered My Horizontal Banner Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes 114 ...

Страница 115: ... the Roll Paper Width list In this case click 16 in Roll 406 4mm and then click OK 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 If printing is unsuccessful you may be able to print after completing the following setting 1 On the Layout sheet click JSpecial Settings to dis play the Special Settings dialog box iPF64...

Страница 116: ...l banner 2 In Page Setup register Custom Page Sizes Mac OS X v10 5 Custom Paper Sizes Mac OS X v10 6 or later Once you register Custom Page Sizes Custom Paper Sizes you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list Custom Page Sizes Custom Paper Sizes can be set up to 18 0 m 3 Print the banner using the settings that correspond to banners Note The following procedures are based on Mac OS ...

Страница 117: ...ing 0 3 in Printer Margins Here too measurements are entered in centimeters 8 Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box 9 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 100 500 the size you registered 10 In GOrientation click the icon of the document in landscape orientation 11 Click OK to close the dialog box Print the banner Follow the steps below to print the...

Страница 118: ...ction in the EPrint Target list 5 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 6 Access the Page Setup pane 7 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes 118 ...

Страница 119: ...paper size the maximum settable size is 3 2 m The setting of Custom Size is disabled when you exit the application software For instructions on specifying non standard paper sizes for printing refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Windows P 119 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X P 121 Printing on Non Stan...

Страница 120: ...30 mm 16 9 16 9 in in the printer 2 Choose Print in the application menu 3 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 183 4 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 5 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 6 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected select from the ...

Страница 121: ...nfirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X For printing on non standard size paper first register the paper size in the printer driver Call a non standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Page Sizes Mac ...

Страница 122: ...FPaper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box 6 In Page Size enter the height and width of the original Here enter 43 00 cm in Height and Width 7 In Printer Margins enter 0 5 for the top and side margins and 2 3 for the bottom margin Here measurements are entered in centimeters 8 Double click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name i...

Страница 123: ...the EPrint Target list 15 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 16 Access the Page Setup pane 17 Click Cut Sheet in the APaper Source list 18 In CPage Size make sure 430 430 is displayed as registered in Page Setup 19 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 iPF6450 Printing on Non Sta...

Страница 124: ...rs in Sections 137 Printing Large Posters Windows 138 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other By arranging originals from word processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets you can create highly expressive presentation materials easy to understand meeting materials and a variety of other prin...

Страница 125: ...ch Other Mac OS X P 127 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applic...

Страница 126: ...e image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired Note Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window repeat steps 1 7 to arrange originals from multiple appli cations on the same page For instructions on editing and rearranging images refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic 9 Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows ...

Страница 127: ...Select the NFree Layout check box 4 Click MPrint 5 The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed 6 Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired Note Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window repeat steps 1 to 4 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page For instructions on editing and rearranging images refer to...

Страница 128: ...r computer and operating system Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Windows P 128 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Mac OS X P 130 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Windows Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Windows This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image without margins between pages Important This feature is only available with rolls It cannot be us...

Страница 129: ...play the Page Setup sheet 6 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 7 Click NRoll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box 8 Select the BBanner Printing check box 9 Click OK iPF6450 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Windows User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 129 ...

Страница 130: ...BFormat for and CPaper Size Note The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the set tings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the up per part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the appli...

Страница 131: ...uality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Click Roll Paper Banner in the APaper Source list 11 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 iPF6450 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 131 ...

Страница 132: ... as desired For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows P 132 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X P 134 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on...

Страница 133: ...ge Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 8 In APage Size click the size of the original as specified in the application software In this case click ISO A3 9 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 10 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm iPF6450 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows User s Guide Enhanced Printi...

Страница 134: ...or tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A3 297 0 420 0 mm 11 7 16 5 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0...

Страница 135: ...cation software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A3 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Layout pane 6 Click 4 in the APages per Sheet list Note You can choose the layou...

Страница 136: ...er 9 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 10 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 11 Access the Page Setup pane 12 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 136 ...

Страница 137: ...log box in this case ISO A3 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 Printing Posters in Sections Printing Posters in Sections You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets By assembling the printed sheets you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported pape...

Страница 138: ... poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets based on the following example Document Poster Page size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in Paper Sheets Paper Size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display ...

Страница 139: ...ut check box 11 Click Poster 2 x 2 in the APage Layout list Note Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing Click BSet under APage Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box On the Pages to Print dialog box clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box iPF6450 Printing Large Posters Windo...

Страница 140: ...ttings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Printing Large Posters Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 140 ...

Страница 141: ...tions on centering originals when printing on rolls refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows P 141 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X P 143 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls b...

Страница 142: ...he Page Setup sheet 7 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 or Letter 8 5 x11 8 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 9 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A3 A4 Roll 297 0mm Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Op...

Страница 143: ...nals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A3 A4 roll 297 0 mm 11 7 in iPF6450 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Pr...

Страница 144: ...ware menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case cl...

Страница 145: ...ed in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the origi nal size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page At tributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the JPrint Centered check box iPF6450 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Printing Option...

Страница 146: ...ls when printing on sheets refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows P 146 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X P 148 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows This topic describes how to reduce an original 50 for printing centered on a sheet Document ...

Страница 147: ... the Page Setup sheet 7 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 8 Select the CEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 9 Click Match Page Size in the GPaper Size list 10 Click FScaling and enter 50 11 Click Manual in the LPaper Source list iPF6450 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options ...

Страница 148: ...Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 Paper Sheets Paper type Plain Paper Paper size Non standard Printing Originals Centered on Sheets...

Страница 149: ...ct the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 for Paper Tray Large Mar gins 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded I...

Страница 150: ...ns 12 Select the JPrint Centered check box 13 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 Important If you have selected Manual as the paper source follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhan...

Страница 151: ...r Width to print rotated pages For tips on conserving roll paper refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating sys tem Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Windows P 151 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X P 153 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Windows Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 D...

Страница 152: ...4 or Letter 8 5 x11 7 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 8 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A3 A4 Roll 297 0mm 9 Select the KRotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper check box 10 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Conserving Roll Paper by R...

Страница 153: ...t for and CPaper Size Note The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the set tings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the up per part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application...

Страница 154: ...e list 9 Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in BRoll Width in this case ISO A3 A4 297 0mm Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane to update the printer information Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper 15...

Страница 155: ... origi nals This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins Important Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases Banner printing If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout Note Even during borderless printing you can print without the top and bottom margins Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency i...

Страница 156: ... Paper Roll paper width A3 A4 roll 297 0 mm 11 7 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 183 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Click the Page S...

Страница 157: ...tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin based on the following example Document Any Type Page si...

Страница 158: ...nt from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper th...

Страница 159: ...own in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane to update the printer information 10 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the origi nal size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page At tributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 11 Select the KNo Spaces at Top or Bottom check box iPF6450 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X User s Guide E...

Страница 160: ...to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper 160 ...

Страница 161: ...iew screen Note Under some settings and in some environments PageComposer may be started Preview Macintosh While viewing the preview screen you can also adjust layout or size settings and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen For instructions on how to check the layout before printing refer to the following topics Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing Windows P 18...

Страница 162: ...rks are applied to all pages of your document Important Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout The following watermarks are provided CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT FILE COPY FINAL PRELIMINARY PROOF TOP SECRET You can also create your own watermarks Specify the following options to customize your watermark Watermark string Specify the font size color and so on Surround ...

Страница 163: ...ype Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 183 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Make yo...

Страница 164: ...out tab to display the Layout sheet 11 Select the CWatermark check box 12 Click FILE COPY in the Watermarks list Note Click DEdit Watermark to open the Edit Watermark dialog box In the Edit Watermark dialog box you can create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks 13 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming...

Страница 165: ... Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows P 165 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X P 167 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation based ...

Страница 166: ...Setup sheet 8 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 or Letter 8 5 x11 9 In HOrientation click JLandscape 10 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 11 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientati...

Страница 167: ...s depending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the set tings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the up per part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list ...

Страница 168: ...ake your selection in the EPrint Target list 9 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 10 Access the Page Setup pane 11 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings 168 ...

Страница 169: ...vorites You can register print settings as Favorites to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations or set tings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly Favorites Registering a favorite for later use You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing and you can check the settings details Note You can also save the favorite settings as f...

Страница 170: ...ting Mac OS X P 171 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Windows Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Windows This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing using the auto cut function as well as how to print a cut line for manual cutting Note The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed Follow the steps below to reactivat...

Страница 171: ... as well as how to print a cut line for manual cutting Note The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled or to select the setting for printing a cut line instead 1 This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size Note The configuration method varies depending on the OS and applicat...

Страница 172: ... to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Page Setup pane 6 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list 7 Access the Main pane 8 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings 172 ...

Страница 173: ...automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel 11 Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box 12 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 366 iPF6450 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Mac OS X User s Guide Enhanced Pr...

Страница 174: ...iPF6450 User s Guide 174 ...

Страница 175: ...int Plug In for Office 320 Status Monitor 732 Accounting 738 Device Setup Utility 727 Media Configuration Tool 573 Color Calibration Management Console 846 Mac OS X Software 361 Handling and Use of Paper 525 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 9...

Страница 176: ... Matching Sheet 193 Color Adjustment Sheet Monochrome 196 Object Adjustment Dialog box Monochrome 197 Gray Adjustment Sheet 198 Page Setup Sheet 199 Output Method Dialog box 202 Paper Size Options Dialog Box 203 Layout Sheet 204 Page Options Dialog Box 205 Special Settings Dialog Box 206 Favorites Sheet 207 Utility Sheet 208 Support Sheet 209 Settings Summaries Dialog Box 210 Device Settings Sheet...

Страница 177: ...heet P 199 You can specify the page size of the original borderless printing enlargement or reduction the orientation the paper size and feed source and automatic cutting Output Method Dialog box P 202 Paper Size Options Dialog Box P 203 Layout Sheet P 204 You can specify the page layout watermarks the orientation the number of copies and print processing options Page Options Dialog Box P 205 Spec...

Страница 178: ...ting of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 244 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver If you have replaced the paper you must complete the following settings in the printer driver Important Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver 1 Choose Print in the ap...

Страница 179: ...Monitor be installed 5 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 6 In the APage Size list select the size of the original as specified in the application 7 In the LPaper Source list select how paper is supplied 8 If you have selected roll paper in LPaper Source select the width of the loaded roll in MRoll Paper Width Note A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to ...

Страница 180: ...n and other settings information Note To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings click GView Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box Checking a print preview You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed When you activate this feature imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing Confirming how documents will be printed t...

Страница 181: ...ser is running access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear Enable Pre view Switching 6 On the main window you can check the layout and change settings as needed 7 To print click Print in the File menu Note For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions see Preview P 211 iPF6450 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing Windows User s Guide Windows Software Printer ...

Страница 182: ... driver dialog box Refer to Accessing the Print er Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 183 3 Perform normal printing settings The favorite is registered from here 4 Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet 5 Click HAdd to display the Add dialog box 6 Enter a desired name in Name such as Photos for Presentations or Monthly Report 7 Choose a fitting icon for these print settings in t...

Страница 183: ...splay the Favorites sheet 4 In the AFavorites choose the favorite you registered Note To import a favorite click IImport and specify the favorite file 5 Click DApply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings 6 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For instructions on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 180 Accessing the Printer D...

Страница 184: ...lication and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed Important If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver the sizes will not be available after you exit the application You can also access the printer driver ...

Страница 185: ...d then display the printer proper ties dialog box 3 Click Printing Preferences to display the Main or Printing Preferences dialog box titled with the name of this printer Note The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver See Device Settings Sheet P 210 iPF6450 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu Windows User s Guide Windows Software Printe...

Страница 186: ...pplications P 183 Main Sheet Main Sheet The following settings are available on the Main sheet For details on settings items refer to the printer driver help file Note On the Main sheet choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing application or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired Common Items AMedia Type Select the typ...

Страница 187: ...ecking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing P 161 MStatus Monitor Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor You can check the printer status job status and other conditions You can also set up email notification if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings For details refer to the Status Monitor help file NAbout Displays version information for the printer driver SDefaults Restores ...

Страница 188: ...raphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 63 FPrint Quality Choose the level of print quality Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 63 GColor Mode Choose the color mode Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 63 Note Depending on the AMedia Type setting some GColor Mode options may not be available HColor Settings Click to display...

Страница 189: ...er source supported by the printer as well as information about the loaded paper To update the paper source and media type settings in the printer driver select the desired Paper Source option and click OK Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box you can set Drying Time for the paper selected with Media Type of the Main sheet e...

Страница 190: ...s after a line is printed Increase the time according to the occurrence condition of bleeding or unevenness DRoll Paper Margin for Safety You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held firmly against the Platen ENear End Margin Specify the length of the Near End Margin the leading edge margin of the roll as needed Setting Ite...

Страница 191: ...ication View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application In the View Settings dialog box you can check details of the selected printing application Note To display the View Settings dialog box on the Main sheet click View Settings by Print Target See Main Sheet P 186 APrint Target Shows all Print Target options settings items for the printing application BName Identifies the item selected in ...

Страница 192: ...red You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other as desired Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper and reducing the Contrast softens images JSatu...

Страница 193: ...Image Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas such as photos BGraphics Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics such as lines and circles CText Select this option to apply color adjustment to text Matching Sheet Matching Sheet On the Matching sheet you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices Importa...

Страница 194: ...the color matching method that suits the document to be printed Various Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in Matching Mode CColor Space Select the applicable color space as desired DMonitor White Point Enter the color temperature set on the monitor Displayed when the BMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching EGamma You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tone...

Страница 195: ... Text clear Use the Same Profile for All Objects and specify the individual settings CPrinter Profile Settings Specify the printer profile as desired Normally select Auto Settings We recommend that you select an ICC profile created using commercially available profile creation software in or der to perform color management accurately on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper...

Страница 196: ...y Tone Not available HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other as desired Increasing the ...

Страница 197: ...to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet AImage Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas such as photos BGraphics Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics such as lines and circles CText Sele...

Страница 198: ...st the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment as desired You can click the arrows by the DX horizontal and EY vertical boxes or enter the values directly JTone You can adjust the brightness of intermediate tones in an image Selecting Hard tone gives a hard impression with more definition Selecting Soft tone gives a soft impre...

Страница 199: ...e as specified in the source application For details on available page sizes see Paper Sizes P 526 BBorderless Printing Borderless printing is available if roll paper is selected in the LPaper Source list Choose from the following op tions when this setting is activated Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size P 98 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 104 Border...

Страница 200: ... by Entering a Scaling Value P 80 DFit Paper Size Scales the document image to match the paper size EFit Roll Paper Width Scales the document image to match the roll width FScaling Resizes the document image based on a specified scaling value Enter a value in a range of 5 600 GPaper Size Choose the size of the paper you will print on For details on available paper sizes see Paper Sizes P 526 HOrie...

Страница 201: ...nting Multiple Pages Continuously P 128 POutput Method Click to display the Output Method dialog box which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name of data to be saved settings Output Method Dialog box P 202 OSize Options Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use Paper Size Options Dialog Box ...

Страница 202: ...y the destination personal box in the Mail box list If Print after reception is complete is checked you can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle These can be selected as Print options BName of data to be saved To use the file name choose Use file name Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name CMa...

Страница 203: ... by users can be deleted from the APaper Size List as needed However they cannot be deleted in the following situations If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected If an oversized paper size is selected If a paper size marked with a red circle is selected CCustom Paper Size Name You can name Custom Paper Size as desired DUnits Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper...

Страница 204: ...s CWatermark Activating this option makes two settings available Watermarks and DEdit Watermark Printing With Watermarks P 162 Watermarks Lists the provided watermarks Choose the watermark to print DEdit Watermark Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own original watermark EPrint Centered Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper Printing...

Страница 205: ...tion to change how printing is processed Special Settings Dialog Box P 206 SDefaults Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values Page Options Dialog Box Page Options Dialog Box The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings Note To display the Page Options dialog box on the Layout sheet click Page Options See Layout Sheet P 204 APrint Date Select where the date is p...

Страница 206: ...Settings Summaries frame to display a list of the setting details under the frame ASpooling at Printer Driver Sets whether or not print jobs are spooled in the printer driver and processed by PageComposer Printing results may be improved in some cases by setting this to No or No EMF Spooling Note When set to No or No EMF Spooling functions such as Page Layout Watermark Reverse Order Page Options F...

Страница 207: ... available on the Favorites sheet For details on settings items refer to the printer driver help AFavorites Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites Using Favorites P 169 BSettings Details Displays details of the favorite selected in the AFavorites CComment Displays notes registered in the favorite DApply Favorite Click to change the current print settings to ...

Страница 208: ...Open dialog box which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a file JExport Click to display the Save As dialog box which enables you to save the favorite settings as a file KUp Click to move the selected favorite up in the AFavorites list LDown Click to move the selected favorite down in the AFavorites list Utility Sheet Utility Sheet The following items can be executed on the Utility s...

Страница 209: ...R P 253 For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 244 Support Sheet Support Sheet On the Support sheet you can view support information and the user s manual ASupport Information Click to access the Canon support webpage where you can find the latest information on the printer and consum ables check for printer driver updates and browse other information BUser Manual Click to view the p...

Страница 210: ...a text editor or similar application Device Settings Sheet Device Settings Sheet Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications However the Device Set tings sheet is for configuring the printer and it is an extension of the printer driver The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet AAbout You can display version information for the...

Страница 211: ...out settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen and you can print the preview screen as it is seen Note The media type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Preview settings Starting Preview Starting Preview Follow the procedure below to start the Preview 1 Start the apllication software w...

Страница 212: ...indow Preview Main Window The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars preview and dialog area and status bar Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Preview Main Window iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Preview 212 ...

Страница 213: ...ialog Area This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job For more information about Dialog Area see Dialog Area P 214 Status Bar This shows the message Pages and Output Size iPF6450 Preview Main Window User s Guide Windows Software Preview 213 ...

Страница 214: ...dia loaded in the printer For more information about Center Originals Across Roll see Print on the Center P 219 Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source No Spaces at Top or Bottom You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom For more information about No Spaces at Top or Bottom see Not Print Spaces at th...

Страница 215: ... Enlarge More Display with the triple of the standard size Note This item can be selected even if you have clicked the button in the toolbar Zoom Moving a Page Moving a Page You can move a page to display when you select Go to Page from the View menu Setting Details First Page Go to the first page Previous Page Go to the previous page Next Page Go to the next page Last Page Go to the last page Go ...

Страница 216: ...otates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing Pages are only rotated if they can fit lengthwise across the roll Use Driver Settings Follows printer driver settings when determining whether to rotate pages Selecting Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper on the printer driver Selecting Use Driver Settings Priority setting for...

Страница 217: ...ting the layout 1 In Layout Selection click the layout button to use Button Details Upper Button Turn at the position of Right Button Turn at the position of Left Button Turn at the position of Lower Button Turn at the position of iPF6450 Printing with Selecting the Layout User s Guide Windows Software Preview 217 ...

Страница 218: ...printing in landscape orientation on roll paper You can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if Cut Sheet is selected Button Details The button is selected currently The button can be selected The button can not be selected 2 Click the Print Button Printing on the selected layout begins Printing with Selecting the Layout iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Preview 218 ...

Страница 219: ...f the media loaded in the printer 1 Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on 2 Click the Print button Printing on the center begins Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source iPF6450 Print on the Center User s Guide Windows Software Preview 219 ...

Страница 220: ... paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom 1 Click the No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on 2 Click the Print button Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Preview 220 ...

Страница 221: ...of Free Layout The Features of Free Layout The main features of Free Layout are as follows Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple file document on one page or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page Any two pages can be ...

Страница 222: ...in the lower left area of this screen 4 In the Layout sheet click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list Click the OK button to save the settings Note When you select Free Layout all other setting items will be disabled 5 On the Print dialog box in the apllication software click the Print button Free Layout main window is displayed Starting Free Layout Windows iPF6450 Us...

Страница 223: ...area and status bar Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool and status bar Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations iPF6450 Free Layout Main Window Windows User s Guide Windows Software Free Layout 223 ...

Страница 224: ...gs from the File menu The printer driver is used to configure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer Refer to Printer Driver P 176 for details on the printer driver Note When you select the Detailed Settings the only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet the Page Setup sheet and the Layout sheet Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled Detailed Settings Wind...

Страница 225: ...tween 1 and 10 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Grid Color Select the grid line color Auto Arrange Spacing Change the object to object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically Note You can input between 0 0 and 100 0 mm between 0 00 and 3 94 inch You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Object Frame Style You can...

Страница 226: ...ge Manual Settings You can input the length of one page to print on roll paper in numerical characters Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source You can input between 203 2 and 18000 0 mm between 8 00 and 708 66 inch You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Order Set the object layout order The following settings are available for order Setting Details Upper L...

Страница 227: ...You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Zoom Dialog Box Zoom Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu You can enlarge or reduce the screen display Scaling Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display Note You can input between 25 and 400 You can change the numbers by clicking button Format Dialog Box Format Dialog...

Страница 228: ...lows you to input the value of the enlargement or reduction ratio of an object Fit Paper Size Prints by enlarging or reducing each object to match the paper size If you are using roll paper objects are enlarged or reduced so that the width of each object matches the width of the roll paper Fit Photo Size Prints all of the objects at the specified photo size Note You can input between 25 and 600 Yo...

Страница 229: ...n confirm the object size Note When several objects are selected you cannot display Object Size Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page You can lay out and print a multiple file document on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File m...

Страница 230: ... Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen When you select Free Layout all other setting items will be disabled 5 Click the OK button to save the settings Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Free Layout 230 ...

Страница 231: ...ut a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu iPF6450 Layin...

Страница 232: ... 3 In the Page Setup sheet select Paper Source Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Free Layout 232 ...

Страница 233: ...creen When you select Free Layout all other setting items will be disabled 5 Click the OK button to save the settings 6 In the Print dialog box select the pages to print and the number of copies and click the OK button iPF6450 Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page Windows User s Guide Windows Software Free Layout 233 ...

Страница 234: ...ct 7 Leaving Free Layout running open other files with other application software and repeat the above steps Selecting an Object Selecting an Object When an object is selected a select box blue border appears around the object Selecting an Object Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Free Layout 234 ...

Страница 235: ...ng a scaling value Note The vertical to horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced Resizing by means of mouse operation 1 Select an object 2 Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle and drag this handle to change the object size Resizing by specifying a scaling value 1 Select an object Click on the Enl Red checkbox...

Страница 236: ...hanging the values in Vertical Pos Horizontal Pos and Page Pos in the Format Dialog Box P 227 Rotating an Object Rotating an Object You can rotate the object 1 Select an object 2 Select Rotate Left 90 Degrees or Rotate Right 90 De grees from the toolbar Alternatively you may click on the Rotate check box in the Format Dialog Box P 227 then select Rotate Right or Rotate Left and click the OK button...

Страница 237: ... in the Page Options Dialog Box P 226 dialog box Aligning Objects Aligning Objects You can align objects systematically 1 Select multiple objects 2 Click the align button from the toolbar Alternatively you may select the align menu from the Object menu Align Top Lays out the objects justifying them to the top Center Vertically Lays out the objects justifying them to the vertical center iPF6450 Lay...

Страница 238: ...ft Lays out the objects justifying them to the left Center Horizontally Lays out the objects justifying them to the horizon tal center Align Right Lays out the objects justifying them to the right Aligning Objects Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Free Layout 238 ...

Страница 239: ... of overlapping affects the order of objects automatically laid out You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object Bring to Front Moves the object to the frontmost position Send to Back Moves the object to the backmost position Bring Forward Moves the object one position to the front iPF6450 Changing the Object Overlapping Order Windows User s Guide Windows Software Fre...

Страница 240: ...ght button of the mouse on an object In order to paste an object on any position that you like you can paste the object with Pointed Paste by clicking the right button of the mouse on any position that you want Folded Duplex Window Folded Duplex Window This window is displayed if you select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu after selecting an object Using the Folded Duplex function allows you to pr...

Страница 241: ...Area This allows you to check the arrangement and orientation of objects Status Bar This shows the paper source roll paper width and output size Finished Size Settings Dialog Box Finished Size Settings Dialog Box This dialog box is displayed when you select Finished Size Settings from the Edit menu This allows you to configure finished size settings iPF6450 Finished Size Settings Dialog Box Window...

Страница 242: ...ing Settings Dialog Box Binding Settings Dialog Box This is displayed when you select Binding Settings from the Edit menu This allows you to configure the binding edge settings Binding Edge Configures the binding edge when folding paper The following settings are available for the binding edge Setting Details Bottom Prints by placing the binding margin gutter at the bottom of the document Top Prin...

Страница 243: ... Edit menu of Free Layout Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area 3 Open the Finished Size Settings dialog box from the Edit menu 4 Select Fit Roll Paper Width or Specify Folded Size in Finished Size Note Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper is also available when Specify Folded Size is selected 5 Click OK to save the settings 6 Open the Binding Settings ...

Страница 244: ...ching methods in addition to borderless printing and enlargement reduction process without growing through the printer driver Note The media type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Follow th...

Страница 245: ...electing Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy from the start button 1 From the Windows start button select Color image RUNNER Enlargement Copy 2 The Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box displays Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box iPF6450 Color imageRUNNER En...

Страница 246: ... of the selected active Hot Folder to inactive Add to Startup folder Register the application in the Windows startup menu Save Printed Data Automatically saves printed data About Button Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility Operation Guide Button Click the button to display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual Hot Folder Hot Folder Hot folder ref...

Страница 247: ... step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 244 2 The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays Click the Next button 3 Select the type of printer to use Click the Next button iPF6450 Creating a New Hot Folder Windows User s Guide Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 247 ...

Страница 248: ...less printing are dis played in the list Click the Next button 5 Select roll paper or cut sheet to print Also select the media size to print Click the Next button 6 Select the color matching method Click the Next button Creating a New Hot Folder Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 248 ...

Страница 249: ... the name of the hot folder You cannot use the Back button after clicking the Next button here 8 Click Finish button to close the Easy Setup Wizard di alog box The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box iPF6450 Creating a New Hot Folder Windows User s Guide Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 249 ...

Страница 250: ...gement Copy dialog box and then click the Add button Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 244 3 The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays Click the Manual Settings button Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 250 ...

Страница 251: ...h selecting Specify a fold er to set the existing shared folder 5 The location of the folders will appear Select the folder to specify a hot folder and click the OK button iPF6450 Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder Windows User s Guide Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 251 ...

Страница 252: ... OK button to close the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 252 ...

Страница 253: ... Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a hot folder and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy fu...

Страница 254: ...ollow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer For detailed instructions refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual 1 Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER 2 Press Send to display the screen for transmission 3 Press Favorites and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder 4 Press Start o...

Страница 255: ...ith a Desired Picture Quality 287 Adjust the Colors and Print 288 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color 288 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 289 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 291 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 292 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 293 Using Adobe CMM 294 Printing an Adjustment Pattern and Selecting Adjustmen...

Страница 256: ... by mounting in a frame with the image extended to the sides of the frame by using the Layout Plug In that is installed at the same time as the Print Plug In for Photoshop See About the Layout Plug In P 315 By using the print history management function you can import past print settings parameters Additionally you can save preferences as a file Note The actual output may differ from the settings ...

Страница 257: ...all button corresponding to the Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional you are us ing For 32 bit Windows For 64 bit Windows iPF6450 Installation Procedures User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 257 ...

Страница 258: ...case refer to the Photoshop manual then specify a folder for the Plug In The Print Plug In for Photoshop cannot be installed on systems where the installed Photoshop has not been started even once In this situation start and then exit Photoshop once before installing the Print Plug In for Photoshop 4 Click Next button 5 After you have read the Licensing Agreement select I accept the terms of the l...

Страница 259: ... Uninstall the Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional 1 Select start in Control Panel menu 2 Select Programs and Features 3 Select Canon iPFxxxx Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional then click Change Remove Note iPFxxxx is the name of your printer Uninstalling the Layout Plug In 1 Select Control Panel from the start menu 2 Select Programs and Features 3 Select imagePROGRAF Layout Plu...

Страница 260: ...be CMM refer to Using Adobe CMM P 294 Note When the color space of the entry screen is CMYK it changes to AdobeRGB due to processing with Print Plug In Also Relative Colorimetric is used for the matching method If the message below is displayed but the Print Plug In window is not displayed install the newest imagePROGRAF printer driver and then attempt step 3 The imagePROGRAF Printer Driver for iP...

Страница 261: ...ormat When an image source profile is ICCv4 you must install AdobeCMM or use Print Plug In in a Windows Vista or later environment When Adobe CMM is not installed in a Windows XP environment a message is displayed and the source profile changes to Adobe RGB To use an ICCv4 profile in a Windows XP environment exit Plug In and then install Adobe CMM For details on installing Adobe CMM refer to Using...

Страница 262: ...follows Main Sheet P 265 Page Setup Sheet P 268 Color Settings Sheet Color P 270 Print History Sheet P 272 Support Sheet P 274 Preview Area You can check the settings you made on the image in this area About the settings available on the preview area see Preview Area P 263 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Main Window iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Pho...

Страница 263: ...In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Help file Preview Area Preview Area You can check the settings you made on the image in this area Preview Select the preview display method For more information about preview see Utilize Three Types of Previews P 285 Setting Details Print Area Layout Displays the print range and the area out of the print range in the layout matching the Paper Size set iP...

Страница 264: ...a checkmark here to simulate the colors of the output product in the preview Note If Auto Color is selected under Output Profile some media types are enabled If ICC profile is selected under Output Profile this is always enabled The actual color balance of the print product and the simulation product may differ with some environments and condi tions In addition when you have selected an ICC Profil...

Страница 265: ...ton to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box For more information about the media detailed settings see Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 278 Input Resolution to Plug in You can select the resolution to process the image with Print Plug In The following settings are available for resolution Setting Details Accuracy 300ppi This processes images at an accurate resolution This can control...

Страница 266: ...ble fields may vary according to the Media Type Input Resolution to Plug in and Input Bit to Plug in settings Output Profile You can select the output profile The following settings are available for the output profile Setting Details Auto Color Performs the optimum color conversion from the input image data color space information sRGB Adobe RGB media settings etc You should normally select these...

Страница 267: ...n Options button This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected as the Output Profile When this button is clicked the ICC Conversion Options dialog box is displayed allowing you to configure color conversion related settings Refer to ICC Conversion Options dialog box P 281 for details on ICC Conversion Options Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maxi...

Страница 268: ...elected method in Output Image Size The following settings are available for enlarged reduced printing Setting Details Fit Paper Size This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug In to match the ex port media size when printing Fit Roll Paper Width This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug In to match the width of the roll paper with...

Страница 269: ... center of the selected Paper Size Specify Print Start Position You can print with specifying the top and left printing start positions in From Top Margin and From Left Margin for Paper Size From Top Margin Input the margin from the top of the media in numbers You can input between 9999 and 9999 mm From Left Margin Input the margin from the left of the media in numbers You can input between 9999 a...

Страница 270: ...ings For more information about the size options see Size Options Dialog Box P 282 Defaults button Click the button to return all of the settings on the Page Setup sheet to their defaults Color Settings Sheet Color Color Settings Sheet Color You can use this sheet to adjust image Color Brightness Contrast Saturation and you can set the color balance of print product more to your liking Note You ca...

Страница 271: ... button to open the Curves dialog box then set the Channel and other settings For more information about Curves see Curves Dialog Box P 283 Defaults button Click the button to return all of the settings on the Color Settings sheet to their defaults Color Settings Sheet Monochrome Color Settings Sheet Monochrome This screen allows you to adjust settings such as the Color Balance Tone Brightness and...

Страница 272: ...to reduce the difference in texture between highlights in the image and the white parts of the paper Adjustment pattern setting button When this button is clicked the Adjustment pattern setting dialog box is displayed The Adjustment pattern setting dialog box allows you to print an adjustment pattern with adjustment values that vary in steps up and down and to select your preferred adjustment valu...

Страница 273: ...more information about Print Information see Set Information to Print with Image P 313 Setting Details Information Print Position Selects the information print position Top Header Information is printed on the top of the image Bottom Footer Information is printed on the bottom of the image Print History Number Place a checkmark here to print the print history number File Name Place a checkmark her...

Страница 274: ...attern setting dialog box Adjustment pattern setting dialog box Displays the adjustment pattern by taking images with the adjustment values varying up and down in steps from the baseline adjustment values in the Color Settings sheet color or monochrome This allows you to print the adjustment pattern and select your preferred adjustment values while comparing the images Preview Area This area allow...

Страница 275: ...ize Paper Size Since the length in the vertical direction may differ between the Use Paper Size and actual printed material this displays the actual output paper size No Space at Paper Bottom Conserve Paper If a margin appears at the bottom of the paper with the paper size selected in Use Paper Size you can conserve paper by selecting this check box to print excluding the margin area The state of ...

Страница 276: ...nting because it may be larger than the actual printed material size Select Dimensions in Pattern Size to print at the input image size without enlarging or reducing the images Patterns that extend past the horizontal width of the paper are printed wrapped onto the next line Pattern Spacing You can select None or Available If Available is selected you can insert a background between each image The...

Страница 277: ...sional is started Furthermore if you select the Update Base Values in the Color Settings Sheet check box and click the Close button the setting values for the image enclosed in the blue frame in the preview area central image are applied to the settings in the Color Settings sheet color or monochrome Print Adjustment Pattern button When this button is clicked printing the adjustment pattern is exe...

Страница 278: ...een line scans during printing Setting Details Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied None The printing continues to the next line immediately after the last line 1sec 3sec 5sec 7sec 9sec The printing continues to the next line after the set time For the media type that has problems such as ink smears on the page or colors that seem un even during borderless printi...

Страница 279: ...results are not used for printing Select this option to avoid changes to image color tones during printing due to color calibration Mirror Specify whether to print a mirror image as needed Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted Unidirectional Printing Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the pri...

Страница 280: ...Printing When you place a checkmark here the plug in closes after printing finishes Note If printing does not finish correctly because it was canceled or an error occurred the plug in does not close Output Method You can select the output method The following settings are available for the output method Setting Details Print Normal printing The print job data is stored temporarily in the box as th...

Страница 281: ...tall Adobe CMM Black Point Compensation Check this check box to perform black point compensation Loss of gradation in dark areas can be improved by performing black point compensation Note This can be used if Adobe CMM is selected as the Conversion Engine Proof Options Configures settings related to printing press simulation The proof options consist of the following settings Setting Details Simul...

Страница 282: ...uideline A print cut guideline is printed after each page and printing continues without interruption No Spaces at Top or Bottom Conserve Paper When you place a checkmark here the print data is printed without margins Size Options Dialog Box Size Options Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you click the Size Options button on the Page Setup Sheet You can select a media name size and other sett...

Страница 283: ...n or Blue Note Gray is displayed for monochrome printing and this selection cannot be changed Input Enter an input value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Output Enter an output value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Load Curves button Click the button to loa...

Страница 284: ...ting Comment Displays comment details Note Up to 200 print history items can be displayed All items above 200 are deleted When you cannot print properly because you canceled the printing or an error occurred appears to the left of the print history number Delete button Click the button to delete the selected print history Add button Click the button to add the selected print history to preferences...

Страница 285: ...heck an image in three types of previews The preview types are as follows Check Image with Print Area Layout P 285 Check the original image with Image P 286 Check Image with Roll Paper Preview P 286 Check Image with Print Area Layout Check Image with Print Area Layout Displays the print range and the area out of the print range in the layout matching the media size set in the print area layout Sel...

Страница 286: ...area for printing When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as on the preview the selected area is deselected Check Image with Roll Paper Preview Check Image with Roll Paper Preview Display the media size and roll paper information on the top in the layout printing on roll paper in Roll Paper Preview Select Roll Paper Preview in Preview Note To select Roll Paper Preview in Preview sel...

Страница 287: ...in the best print quality but this takes more time to print than Accuracy 300ppi while also requiring more memory capacity High Accuracy 600ppi will not display with some Media Type settings 4 Choose either High Gradation 8bit or Highest Gradation 16bit for the bit number when processing images in Input Bit to Plug in Note When you select High Gradation 8bit images are processed at 8 bit channel 2...

Страница 288: ...294 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview The following explanation is on the procedures for adjusting example image below Low for Cyan High for Yellow Low for Saturation Warm Black for Gray Tone Enhance brightness for the curves The above image adjustment...

Страница 289: ...ted in the image and printing begins Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview The following explanation is about the procedures for adjusting example image below Low for Contrast Light for Highlight Light for Shadow Enhance brightness for the curves...

Страница 290: ... In Shadow drag the slide bar toward Light Note You can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 7 Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 290 ...

Страница 291: ...in color on the screen and in the printer In Print Plug In for Photo shop Digital Photo Professional you can get the color balance of the print product closer to the color balance displayed on the screen through performing ICC International Color Consortium color profile settings matching method settings and settings for the internal profile which performs optimum color conversion in response to m...

Страница 292: ...g method that you have set Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images This prints a high quality Adobe RGB16bit image taken with a high end digital camera Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional allows you to print high color gamut and high tone images when the Adobe RGB16bit image data has been retouched in Photoshop without compromising the l...

Страница 293: ... Click the Print button Printing of the Adobe RGB16bit image begins Prints monochrome photographs with high quality Prints monochrome photographs with high quality Prints images captured with a scanner or digital camera in monochrome with high quality Provides stable monochrome photo images without color casts and minimizes the influences of the difference of the light source 1 Display the Main sh...

Страница 294: ...ite http www adobe com 2 Enter Adobe CMM in the search input box on the screen 3 Search for the Adobe Color Management Module CMM item and select the Windows version 4 Download the file by following the on screen directions 5 Start the installer in the downloaded file to perform the installation Important Use version 1 1 or higher of Adobe CMM Adobe CMM System Requirements The system requirements ...

Страница 295: ...stment Values Since you can print an adjustment pattern and select your preferred adjustment values while comparing the images this allows you to conserve ink and paper and save the time it takes to repeatedly check adjustment results The procedure for displaying and printing an adjustment pattern is as follows 1 Display the Color Settings sheet color or monochrome and set the adjustment values to...

Страница 296: ... OK button 4 Set Rotate 90 degrees Pattern Size Pattern Spacing and Pattern Background as needed 5 For the Paper Source setting select how the paper to print on is to be supplied 6 For the Use Paper Size setting select the paper size to print on 7 Click the Print Adjustment Pattern button The adjustment pattern starts printing 8 Check the image in the adjustment pattern that is closest to the cust...

Страница 297: ...following procedure Use this to avoid saturation in the black areas of images Important Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use black point compensation Refer to Using Adobe CMM P 294 for details on how to install Adobe CMM 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button to open the ICC Conversion Options dialog box ...

Страница 298: ... ICC Conversion Options dialog box 5 Configure the Proof Options as needed Note The proof options are Simulate Paper Color and Simulate Black Ink The settings that can be selected vary de pending on the Conversion Engine settings 6 Click the OK button to close the ICC Conversion Options dialog box 7 Click the Print button Printing begins Enlarge Reduce and Print Enlarge Reduce and Print You can en...

Страница 299: ... Size setting 1 Display the Page Setup sheet 2 Select the size of the media that you want to print in Paper Size Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing This is not displayed when Fit Roll Paper Widthis set in Enlarged Reduced Printing 3 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the i...

Страница 300: ...s dialog box see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 282 Click the Defaults button to return all of the roll paper option settings to their defaults 5 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees ...

Страница 301: ...rs on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Scaling and input the scaling factor or drag the four corners of the image in the Preview display Note You can specify scaling rate in intervals of 0 01 You can specify a ...

Страница 302: ...he specified media must be set to the printer 1 Display the Page Setup sheet 2 Select Roll Paper in Paper Source 3 Click the Borderless Printing check box on Note Select the width for roll paper set in the printer in Roll Paper Width in the Specify Roll Paper Width dialog box and click OK 4 Click the Print button Borderless printing begins Print with No Borders iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Softwar...

Страница 303: ...p Digital Photo Professional those settings are saved as print history Also you can export and import as files You can store often used print history under a specified name in print preferences Note You can save up to 200 print history items All items over 200 are deleted in chronological order You can do the following things using print history Confirm Print History Details P 304 Apply Print Hist...

Страница 304: ...story you wish to check the details of from either Print History or Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box 3 Check the print history details in Settings and click the OK button Note You can display the print history details by switching the sheets Confirm Print History Details iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 304 ...

Страница 305: ...Apply button Store Print History to Print Preferences Store Print History to Print Preferences You can store often used print history to print preferences Not only can you store the print history stored under a differ ent name in print preferences you can also find it with ease Note You can store up to 200 print history items to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Detai...

Страница 306: ...s 4 Select the print history you wish to store in print prefer ences from Print History and click the button 5 In the Add Favorites dialog box input the name of the print history in Name input a comment in Comment and click the OK button Store Print History to Print Preferences iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 306 ...

Страница 307: ...lete Print History You can delete print history Important Be aware that you cannot undo deletions of print history 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button iPF6450 Delete Print History User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 307 ...

Страница 308: ...he Print History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OKbutton to close the Print History Details dialog box Delete Print History iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 308 ...

Страница 309: ... the print history you wish to export from Favor ites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Export button 4 Input the name of the print history in File Name in the Save As dialog box and click the Save button The print history is exported under the specified file name iPF6450 Export Print History from Print Preferences User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digit...

Страница 310: ... can import print history in file format and store it to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Click the Import button of the Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box Import Print History to Print Preferences iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 310 ...

Страница 311: ...ed from a different OS in Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Profes sional You cannot import a print history file exported from a different printer in Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 5 Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box iPF6450 Import Print History to Print Preferences User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Pho...

Страница 312: ...tory items in print pref erences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to delete from Favor ites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button Delete Print History from Print Preferences iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 312 ...

Страница 313: ...n the media a break will appear in the printed information The information may print on the image data with some media sizes enlargement rates and print position values When Keep Media Size is set to On on the printer a portion of bottom of the print data is not printed 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Print Information check box on 3 Select the position where you wish to print the in...

Страница 314: ...o edit the comment move to step 7 6 Input the comment in the Edit Comment dialog box and click OK button 7 Click the Print button Comments are printed with images Set Information to Print with Image iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 314 ...

Страница 315: ...g In can be printed as is from the Print Plug In for Photoshop For details on the functionality of the Layout Plug In see Layout Plug In Main Window P 315 For details on how to start and how to use the Layout Plug In see Creating and Printing a Layout Image for Mounting on a Frame P 318 Layout Plug In Main Window Layout Plug In Main Window This window is for creating a layout image for finishing a...

Страница 316: ...ion that protrudes past the canvas sides This allows you to prevent white paper from appearing on the canvas sides when mounted The larger the amount of extension the larger the area hidden behind the back surface Important Since values entered in mm or inches are first converted temporarily to pixels and then reconverted to mm or inches values may be displayed that differ from the entered values ...

Страница 317: ...ed the Print Plug In for Photoshop starts To print the created layout image click the Print button in the Print Plug In for Photoshop main window Important When you close the Print Plug In the created layout image is discarded Note If the Print Plug In for Photoshop for multiple different models is installed a screen for selecting the model is displayed when you click the Execute button When you c...

Страница 318: ...m the Paper Size List 2 Click the Delete button Note Sizes that have a red circle in the Name cannot be deleted Creating and Printing a Layout Image for Mounting on a Frame Creating and Printing a Layout Image for Mounting on a Frame The procedure for creating and printing a layout image for mounting on a frame is as follows 1 Start Photoshop 2 Open the image to lay out and edit the image in Photo...

Страница 319: ...he created layout image is discarded 6 Mount the printed layout image on the frame Important Fully dry the printed paper before mounting it on the frame Take care when mounting on the frame The ink may peel off if you touch the printed surface Note As you fold the printed paper along the frame the folded areas may crack and reveal the paper underneath depending on the media type You can prevent th...

Страница 320: ...g In for Office is a Plug In that enables easy printing from Microsoft Office It is displayed on the toolbar ribbon so it is easily accessible It can be set by just selecting from the Wizard Large Format Printing custom size can also be set in the Wizard from Microsoft Word or Microsoft Power Point Custom size can be set automatically from Microsoft Excel The layout can be checked before printing ...

Страница 321: ...rt User Software CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and start the installer Note If the installer screen does not display open the CD ROM icon from My Computer click setup exe and open the icon 2 Click the Install Individual Software button 3 Click Install in imagePROGRAF Print Plug In iPF6450 Steps to install Windows User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Office 321 ...

Страница 322: ...4 Click the Next button 5 Read the License Agreement and click the Yes but ton 6 Click the Start button Steps to install Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Office 322 ...

Страница 323: ...ht not be displayed in Microsoft Office after installing imagePROGRAF Print Plug In for Office Refer to the following topic for details on how to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In for Office toolbar ribbon When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed P 324 Steps to uninstall Steps to uninstall Below are the steps to uninstall Print Plug In for Office 1 If Microsoft Office is open close it 2...

Страница 324: ...ication dis ables add ins as a safety precaution In this event you will need to re install Print Plug In for Office to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon Note You cannot re install Print Plug In for Office once an Office application is running When the message appears select Can cel and close the active Office application Re install Print Plug In for Office as follows 1 Close Mi...

Страница 325: ...x and click the Go button 4 If Addin imageprograf print plug in ipfaddinif dll is dis played in the Disabled Items dialog box select it and click the Enable button 5 Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application For Microsoft Office 2007 iPF6450 When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed Windows User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Office 325 ...

Страница 326: ...rom the list on the left side of the application name options dialog box select Add ins 3 Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and click the Go button When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Office 326 ...

Страница 327: ...e all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application For Microsoft Office 2003 1 Click About application name in the Help menu of applica tion 2 Click the Disabled Items button in the About appli cation name dialog box iPF6450 When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed Windows User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Office 327 ...

Страница 328: ...ayed 4 Click the buttons on the toolbar ribbon according to the items you want to set Icon Contents Menu Displays the About Help and Special Settings dialog boxes You can change the settings using the Special Settings dialog box Refer to Configuring Special Settings P 359 for details Printer list Select Printer If you select Show All Printers the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again Selec...

Страница 329: ...is open close the Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data If that is the case modify the data again Print Matching Roll Width Word Print Matching Roll Width Word Prints to the edge of the roll width You can print large exhibits and posters and also print P...

Страница 330: ...ay to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Matching Roll Width 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select image size 7 Select layout Print Matching Roll Width Word Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In fo...

Страница 331: ... the same setting Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum length will be the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Borderless Printing Word Borderless Printing Word Prints up to the border of the media Photos...

Страница 332: ...ot be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Borderless Printing 5 A confirmation dialog box is displayed If the data fills up the page confirm that Continue using the plug in is selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK Note To adjust the data select Return to application and press OK Exit Print Plug In for Office and return to the appli cation Borderless Printing Word...

Страница 333: ...uration is selected you can print posters etc vividly Press the One Touch Registration button to register the settings This is useful for multiple printing using the same settings Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper wid...

Страница 334: ...e imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Multi Page Printing 5 Select the Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer Mu...

Страница 335: ...he layout in the preview screen The maximum length for Multi Page Printing is the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 11 Press Print to start printing Register the settings Word Register the settings Word If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting you can select One Touch Registration Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings 1 Se...

Страница 336: ...Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings Print Using Registered Settings Word Print Using Registered Settings Word Prints using the registered settings 1 Start Microsoft Word 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Print Using Registered Setting...

Страница 337: ...ges is selected enter the number of pages 8 Enter Copies Note When Print in Draft mode is selected printing is fast but the print quality is poor When Saturation is selected you can print posters etc vividly Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum print length when printing with the registered setti...

Страница 338: ...ord 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Note If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large Format Printing Wizard is open close the Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to chang...

Страница 339: ...rd P 329 Important The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data If that is the case modify the data again To start from Microsoft PowerPoint To start from Microsoft PowerPoint Below are the steps to start Print Plug In for Office from Microsoft PowerPoint 1 Start Microsoft PowerPoint 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed on the toolbar ribbon click it iPF6450 To st...

Страница 340: ...printer drivers or update the display Print Button The print Wizard is displayed The settings Print Matching Roll Width Borderless Printing Multi Page Printing and Print Using Registered Settings can be set Paper Settings Button Large Format Wizard is displayed Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set Printing Wizard dialog box Important If you want to change the display to anothe...

Страница 341: ...ata again Note If you open a password protected document as read only the Large Format Printing Wizard cannot be run Re move the password protection Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint Prints to the edge of the roll width You can print large exhibits and posters and also print Portrait and Landscape ori entations made in Large Format Printing Wizard 1 Start Mi...

Страница 342: ... while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Matching Roll Width 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select image size 7 Select layout Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Office 342 ...

Страница 343: ...tting Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum length will be the lesser of 14 22 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Borderless Printing PowerPoint Borderless Printing PowerPoint Prints up to the border of the media Photos...

Страница 344: ...be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Borderless Printing 5 A confirmation dialog box is displayed If the data fills up the page confirm that Continue using the plug in is selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK Note To adjust the data select Return to application and press OK Exit Print Plug In for Office and return to the appli cation Borderless Printing PowerPo...

Страница 345: ... Saturation is selected you can print posters etc vividly Press the One Touch Registration button to register the settings This is useful for multiple printing using the same settings Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 14 22 times the roll paper...

Страница 346: ...rom the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Multi Page Printing 5 Select the Roll Paper Width that is set in the prin...

Страница 347: ...review screen The maximum length for Multi Page Printing is the lesser of 14 22 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 11 Press Print to start printing Register the settings PowerPoint Register the settings PowerPoint If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting you can select One Touch Registration Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings 1 Set up t...

Страница 348: ...e Print screen will not delete the registered settings Print Using Registered Settings PowerPoint Print Using Registered Settings PowerPoint Prints using the registered settings 1 Start Microsoft PowerPoint 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Print Using Registered S...

Страница 349: ...ides is selected enter the slide number 8 Enter Copies Note When Print in Draft mode is selected printing is fast but the print quality is poor When Saturation is selected you can print posters etc vividly Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum print length when printing with the registered setting...

Страница 350: ...rPoint 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box is dis played Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large Format Printing Wizard is open close the Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able...

Страница 351: ...e in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard For details on Print Matching Roll Width see Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint P 341 To start from Microsoft Excel To start from Microsoft Excel Below are the steps to start Print Plug In for Office from Microsoft Excel 1 Start Microsoft Excel 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed on the toolbar ribbon click it iPF6450 To start ...

Страница 352: ... Sheet and Print Selected Area can be set Printing Wizard dialog box Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard will not start if you click the Print button on the toolbar ribbon while editing a cel...

Страница 353: ...ton with a worksheet or cell protected a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing If you click No you will return to the application If you want to change the setting remove the protection from the worksheet or cell Print Entire Sheet Excel Print Entire Sheet Excel For resizing the entire sheet to fit the roll width Choose this option to enlarge the currently displaye...

Страница 354: ...orming you that analysis is in progress The Layout menu will appear automatically Note If data analysis requires time a message dialog will appear If you select No you will return to the application Print Entire Sheet Excel Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print Plug In for Office 354 ...

Страница 355: ...n When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum print length is 18 0m 12 If the upper and lower margins are too wide check No Spaces at Top or Bottom Conserve Paper The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview 13 Press Print to start printing Important If divided into plural pages try reducing the data size or the range you select You cannot run Print or Print Preview if ...

Страница 356: ...y one worksheet and click Print again If a print area is set a confirmation message dialog box will appear To print the selected area cancel the setting of the print area The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed 4 Click Print Selected Area Important If only one cell is selected Print Selected Area cannot be selected Print Selected Area Excel Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Windows Software Print P...

Страница 357: ...sis Note If data analysis requires time a message dialog will appear If you select No you will return to the application 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select image size 7 Select layout 8 To configure Binding click the Binding Settings button Refer to Configuring Binding Excel P 358 for details on the procedure for configuring Binding iPF6450 Print Selected Area Excel Windo...

Страница 358: ...ral pages try reducing the data size or the range you select You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed Configuring Binding Excel Configuring Binding Excel You can configure Binding margins for binding printouts 1 Configure the settings up to Layout Selection in the Layout screen in Print Entire Sheet or Print Selected Area Refer to Print Entire S...

Страница 359: ...x Configuring Special Settings Configuring Special Settings You can configure Special Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar 1 Click imagePROGRAF in the toolbar and select Spe cial Settings 2 Turn the checkbox for the item you want to change on or off Item Details Show progress indicator during plug in startup When this setting is off hides the progress indicator that appears while t...

Страница 360: ...e created at the maximum size This re duces the enlargement ratio during actual printing which minimizes degradation of the quality of photos etc This function is only valid in Microsoft PowerPoint Correct the print area when analyzing For data that cannot be processed with usual data analysis the print area is cor rected and then the data is processed When data analysis fails you may be able to p...

Страница 361: ...hoto Professional 462 Layout Plug In for Photoshop 520 Printmonitor 735 Media Configuration Tool 605 Color Calibration Management Console 883 Handling and Use of Paper 525 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications...

Страница 362: ...r Settings Pane Color 377 Object Adjustment dialog box Color 378 Color Settings Pane Monochrome 379 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome 380 Gray Adjustment Pane 380 Page Setup Pane 382 Utility Pane 383 Additional Settings Pane 384 Support Pane 384 Printer Driver Settings Printer Driver Settings For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver refer to the following topics Accessing th...

Страница 363: ...P 383 You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Additional Settings Pane P 384 You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer Support Pane P 384 You can view support information and the user s manual With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature you can arrange originals from various...

Страница 364: ...g box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the up per part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print ...

Страница 365: ...oaded roll is displayed in BRoll Width Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane to update the printer information Note A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings P 362 iPF6450 Specifying Pa...

Страница 366: ...played Pane displayed when the ISize tab is clicked Paper size details are indicated numerically Pane with printer and paper illustrations Illustrations indicate the paper source orientation borderless printing selection and other set tings information Note To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings click GView set on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box Checking a pri...

Страница 367: ... menu Note For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions refer to Preview P 386 Using Favorites Using Favorites You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite based printing Note In the printing dialog box click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings This is a standard feature of the operating system For details refer to the Mac OS documentation iPF6450 Using Fav...

Страница 368: ... shown in the following illustration you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing including enlarged and re duced printing borderless printing and so on Main Pane Main Pane The following settings are available on the Main pane For details on settings items refer to the printer driver help Note On the Main pane choose Easy Settings to specify...

Страница 369: ... drying time Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 372 OPrint Preview If you turn this on imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing This allows you to check on screen previews of documents before printing Important When Free Layout is selected on the Page Setup panel Free Layout is disabled Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing P 161 LPrinter Information Displays the Printer Informatio...

Страница 370: ...which enables you to confirm the settings for the selected item from the EPrint Target list or change the order of items listed in EPrint Target View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application P 374 Configuration using Advanced Settings EPrint Priority Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P ...

Страница 371: ...o display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 56 JUnidirectional Printing Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality However the printing speed becomes slower QThicken Fine Lines Activate this option to print fine lines more distinctly Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box ...

Страница 372: ...aits for ink to dry as needed The Between Pages setting is only valid for rolls CBetween Pages You can set the time to wait after printing 1 document page until ejecting the paper Since waiting time is required for ink to dry before a roll is cut you can deliver paper in the Output Stacker with the ink dried even if Cutting Mode is set to Automatic Setting Item Details Printer Default The setting ...

Страница 373: ...ting of the control panel of the printer is applied High Speed When the Standard setting does not result in a clean cut surface select this Standard Select this when you do not have any problems in automatic cutting Low Speed This helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you select it when using adhesive paper HAutomatic Cutting Set whether to perform roll c...

Страница 374: ... Print Target See Main Pane P 368 APrint Target Shows all Print Target options settings items for the printing application BName Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon CDetails Here you can confirm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list Matching pane Matching pane On the Matching pane you can specify color matching to compensate for d...

Страница 375: ...olor matching method that suits the document to be printed Various BMatching Method options are available depending on your selection in AMatching Mode CColor Space Select the applicable color space as desired DMonitor White Point Enter the color temperature set on the monitor Displayed when the BMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching EGamma You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones i...

Страница 376: ...an choose CMatching Method Various options are available depending on your selected AMatching Mode DPrinter Profile Settings Specify the printer profile as desired We recommend that you select an ICC profile created using commercially available profile creation software in or der to perform color management accurately on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper The created ICC...

Страница 377: ...t this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image DCyan EMagenta FYellow Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color GGray Tone Adjust the color tone of grays as desired Choose Cool tinged with blue or Warm tinged with red HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the orig...

Страница 378: ...ustment to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel AImages Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas such as photos BGraphics Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics such as lines and circles C...

Страница 379: ...ple image DCyan EMagenta FYellow Not available GGray Tone Not available HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portion...

Страница 380: ...bject Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel AImages Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas such as photos BGraphics Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics such as lines and circles CText Select this option to apply color adjustment to text Gray Adjustment Pane Gray Adjustment Pane On the Gray Adjustment pane you can adjus...

Страница 381: ...ou can click the arrows by the DX horizontal and EY vertical boxes or enter the values directly JTone You can adjust the brightness of intermediate tones in an image Selecting Hard tone gives a hard impression with more definition Selecting Soft tone gives a soft impression FBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter o...

Страница 382: ...o choose the following options Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size P 70 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 74 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value P 80 EFit Paper Size Resizes the document image to match the paper size FFit Roll Paper Width Resizes the document image to match the roll width GScaling Resizes the document image based on a specified scaling value Enter a valu...

Страница 383: ...s P 155 LRotate Page 90 degrees Select this checkbox to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees P 151 NFree Layout Select this checkbox to start imagePROGRAF Free Layout before printing This allows you to print multiple documents next to each other Important When Print Preview is selected on the Main panel Print Preview is disa...

Страница 384: ...itional Settings pane AData Send Method Display the method of sending print jobs to the printer BSend job to You can configure the method for saving print jobs to the printer hard disk CPrint after reception is complete You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle Support Pane Support Pane On the Support pa...

Страница 385: ...r Manual Click to view the printer user s manual This function requires the user s manual to be installed on your computer CSettings The settings can be saved as a file Click to display the Export dialog box which enables you to specify where to save the file DAbout You can display version information for the printer driver iPF6450 Support Pane Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Printer Drive...

Страница 386: ... The main features of Preview are as follows While viewing this screen you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen and you can print the preview screen as it is seen Note The media type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause...

Страница 387: ...rint button in the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 5 Preview main window is displayed iPF6450 Starting Preview Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Preview 387 ...

Страница 388: ...dialog drawer and status area Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Preview Main Window Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Preview 388 ...

Страница 389: ... Preview Area You can check the settings you made in this area iPF6450 Preview Main Window Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Preview 389 ...

Страница 390: ... print job Drawer Area This allows you to display the thumbnails of a document This area appears when you click Drawer from the tool bar Alternatively you may select Drawer from the View menu Preview Main Window Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Preview 390 ...

Страница 391: ...a type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results Easy Settings Advanced Settings Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs The settings available on each mode are as follows Easy Settings P 393 Advanced Settings P 394 iPF6450 Paper Settings Panel Mac OS X Use...

Страница 392: ... the paper used If this happens select another paper source Roll Paper Width This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Restore Defaults Button Click the button...

Страница 393: ...ing photographic images captured with a digital camera Photo Monochrome Suitable for optimized printing of monochrome photos Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by minimizing color differences Suitable for when the printing results are too vivid or when printing scanned images Photo Adobe RGB Prints using a color space wi...

Страница 394: ...i 300dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft however print quality is higher Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High however print quality is lower Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Presents detailed settings for the print qual...

Страница 395: ...ument Prints common office documents such as proposals memos for distribution etc so they are easy to read Note The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type Print Quality Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations ...

Страница 396: ...l paper with the page width Make sure that the width of the roll paper in the printer is set correctly for Roll Paper Width in the Paper Settings panel Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Scaling Enlarges reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified Input the scaling value in nu merical characters You can specify a range between 5 and 600 You can change the numbers by c...

Страница 397: ... Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom P 410 Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Rotate Page Select the method for rotating page The following settings are available for rotating page Setting Details Rotate Right 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation When the rotated page can fit in the width of roll paper the page is rotated au...

Страница 398: ...or printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled monochrome No color correction Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver Select this when color matching is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to print color charts using the profile creation tool Note The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type s...

Страница 399: ...review Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire printer information Color Adjustment Color Adjustment You can set the color adjustment Adjusting Color Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application but if you see colors in the printout that do not match colors on the screen you can perform color adjustments 1 Select Colo...

Страница 400: ...fore scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color Gray Tone Adjusts gray from cool bl...

Страница 401: ...esults of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Not...

Страница 402: ...ment 3 Click the Color Balance list and select the color settings Setting Details Cool Black Adjusts cool black blue tones to gray Pure Neutral Black Adjusts to neutral gray Warm Black Adjusts warm black red tones to gray Note To perform the adjustments drag the X or Y slide bar left and right You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value by...

Страница 403: ...of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Highlight Adjusts the brightness of the brightest areas Shadow Adjusts the brightness of the darkest areas Note You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increa...

Страница 404: ...ws you to use ICC profiles for digital cameras and scanners ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool etc ColorSync P 408 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing Note You need to set each correction on the printer driver ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel of ...

Страница 405: ...lected in Matching Mode Input Profile Select the input profile Note You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode Printer Profile Select the printer profile Note You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode Soft Proof When you place a checkmark here ColorSync applies to the preview area Note You can select only after ColorSync has ...

Страница 406: ... printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Perceptual People Dark Areas Color matching optimized for printing subdued photos such as indoor shots o...

Страница 407: ...vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Colorimetric No White Point Cor rection The processing ...

Страница 408: ...ync to previews check the Soft Proof check box Preferences Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview menu You can set the preferences for Preview Units Set the unit for paper length margins and so on ColorSync Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Preview 408 ...

Страница 409: ...age number in numerical characters to display in the preview area Note You can change the numbers in the range of the page of the documents Print with No Borders Print with No Borders You can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image Note With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges To use the borderless printing function the...

Страница 410: ...1 On the Output Settings Panel P 396 click the Print Centered check box on 2 Click the Print button Printing on the center begins Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing ...

Страница 411: ...90 Degrees Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees You can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper 1 On the Paper Settings Panel P 391 select Roll Paper in Paper Source 2 On the Output Settings Panel P 396 click the Rotate Page check box on 3 Select Rotate Right 90 Degrees or Rotate Left 90 De grees 4 Click the Print button Printing on rotating 90 degrees begins iPF6450 Print Page Rota...

Страница 412: ... width of the paper it is displayed Display with All Display with All In the preview area you can display all 1 Select Fit Screen from the tool bar 2 All is displayed Display with Actual Size Display with Actual Size In the preview area you can display the actual size 1 Select Actual Size from the tool bar Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Softwa...

Страница 413: ...ct each button in Go to Page on the tool bar Setting Details Go to the first page Go to the previous page Go to the next page Go to the last page 2 The target page appears Note You can also move a page by clicking the page on the thumbnails iPF6450 Moving a Page Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Preview 413 ...

Страница 414: ...es of Free Layout The Features of Free Layout The main features of Free Layout are as follows Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple file document on one page or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page Note The media typ...

Страница 415: ...utton in the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 5 Free Layout main window is displayed iPF6450 Starting Free Layout Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 415 ...

Страница 416: ...ayout area and dialog areas Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Free Layout Main Window Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 416 ...

Страница 417: ... Layout Area This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation iPF6450 Free Layout Main Window Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 417 ...

Страница 418: ... Dialog Area This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job Free Layout Main Window Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 418 ...

Страница 419: ... printer you may not receive the desired print results Easy Settings Advanced Settings Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs The settings available on each mode are as follows Easy Settings P 421 Advanced Settings P 422 Paper Source You can select the paper source The following settings are available for paper source Setting Details Roll Paper Select to print on ro...

Страница 420: ...th This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout Print Button Click the ...

Страница 421: ...g photographic images captured with a digital camera Photo Monochrome Suitable for optimized printing of monochrome photos Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by minimizing color differences Suitable for when the printing results are too vivid or when printing scanned images Photo Adobe RGB Prints using a color space with...

Страница 422: ...0dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft however print quality is higher Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High however print quality is lower Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Presents detailed settings for the print priority...

Страница 423: ...ent Prints common office documents such as proposals memos for distribution etc so they are easy to read Note The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type Print Quality Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations Se...

Страница 424: ... printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled monochrome No color correction Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver Select this when color matching is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to print color charts using the profile creation tool Note The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type sel...

Страница 425: ...Layout Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire printer information Color Adjustment Color Adjustment You can set the color adjustment Adjusting Color Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application but if you see colors in the printout that do not match colors on the screen you can perform color adjustments 1 Select Colo...

Страница 426: ...re scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color Gray Tone Adjusts gray from cool blac...

Страница 427: ...ults of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Note ...

Страница 428: ...nt 3 Click the Color Balance list and select the color settings Setting Details Cool Black Adjusts cool black blue tones to gray Pure Neutral Black Adjusts to neutral gray Warm Black Adjusts warm black red tones to gray Note To perform the adjustments drag the X or Y slide bar left and right You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value by X...

Страница 429: ... brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Highlight Adjusts the brightness of the brightest areas Shadow Adjusts the brightness of the darkest areas Note You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase...

Страница 430: ... you to use ICC profiles for digital cameras and scanners ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool etc ColorSync P 434 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing Note You need to set each correction on the printer driver ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel of th...

Страница 431: ...cted in Matching Mode Input Profile Select the input profile Note You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode Printer Profile Select the printer profile Note You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode Soft Proof When you place a checkmark here ColorSync applies to the layout area Note You can select only after ColorSync has bee...

Страница 432: ...rinting image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Perceptual People Dark Areas Color matching optimized for printing subdued photos such as indoor shots of ...

Страница 433: ...vidly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Colorimetric No White Point Cor rection The processing me...

Страница 434: ... a printer profile ColorSync ColorSync 1 Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode 2 Place a checkmark on Soft Proof to simulate the output product in Layout Area ColorSync Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 434 ...

Страница 435: ...lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects Note You can input between 1 and 10 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Grid Color Select the grid line color Print Object Frames You can print the object border Note If you do not want to print the object border deselect the Print Object Frames check box Object Frame Style You can select the object frame style fo...

Страница 436: ...ation as it is Horizontal Prints the image and text by rotating sideways 90 degrees from the orientation as specified in the application Roll Paper Length Set the length of one page to print on roll paper When you place a checkmark on Auto Settings the one page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically set so that the laid out objects are printed on one page Note Available only if rolls ...

Страница 437: ...m Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu You can enlarge or reduce the screen display Scaling Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display Note You can input between 10 and 400 You can change the numbers by clicking button Format Dialog Box Format Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Format from the Object menu after you...

Страница 438: ...g box select the pages to print and the number of copies and click the Print button Free Layout starts laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object 4 Leaving Free Layout running open other files with the application software and repeat the above steps Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page Laying out a Document Crea...

Страница 439: ...ect Select All from the Edit menu Changing the Object Size Changing the Object Size You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value Note The vertical to horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced Resizing by means of mouse operation 1 Select an object 2 Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to...

Страница 440: ... position 1 Select an object 2 Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle and drag it to move the object Rotating an Object Rotating an Object You can rotate the object 1 Select an object 2 Select Rotate Left or Rotate Right from the toolbar Alternatively you may click on the Rotate check box in the Format Dialog Box P 437 then select Rotate Right or Rota...

Страница 441: ...menu Note The object layout order varies depending on the Order setting on the Page Setup Dialog Box P 436 Aligning Objects Aligning Objects You can align objects systematically 1 Select multiple objects 2 Select the align menu from the Object menu Align Top Lays out the objects justifying them to the top iPF6450 Laying out Objects Automatically Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout ...

Страница 442: ...gn Bottom Lays out the objects justifying them to the bottom Align Left Lays out the objects justifying them to the left Center Horizontally Lays out the objects justifying them to the horizon tal center Aligning Objects Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 442 ...

Страница 443: ...er You can change the object overlapping order 1 Select an object 2 Select the overlapping order menu from the Object menu Bring to Front Moves the object to the frontmost position Send to Back Moves the object to the backmost position iPF6450 Changing the Object Overlapping Order Mac OS X User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 443 ...

Страница 444: ...ied or Cut Object 1 Click Copy or Cut from the toolbar Alternatively you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu 2 Click Paste from the toolbar Alternatively you may select Paste from the Edit menu Note The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page Pasting a Copied or Cut Object Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Free Layout 444 ...

Страница 445: ...Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection media type and output profile selection and matching methods in additi...

Страница 446: ...lick the Set button in Configure Color imageRUN NER Enlargement Copy to open the Color image RUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Note You can also start the utility directly by clicking on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy app icon in Applications Canon Utilities iR Enlargement Copy If you are using Mac OS X v10 7 and later start it from Launchpad Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Ma...

Страница 447: ... files in the hot folder Add Button Click the button to open the Destination Selection dialog box so that you can add a hot folder Edit Button From the Hot Folder list select a hot folder and click this button to open the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box that allows you to edit the hot folder Monitor Hot Folder Constantly If the check box is selected the Hot Folder is monitored from after the next l...

Страница 448: ...Click the Add button in Enlarged Copy Settings to open the Destination Selection dialog box 3 From the printer list in Destination select the printer of destination 4 Click the OK button to open the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box 5 In Name enter the name to display in the Hot Folder list 6 In Hot Folder enter the Hot Folder name Creating a New Hot Folder Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Soft...

Страница 449: ...onfig ure the sharing For Mac OS X v10 7 and later Check the File Sharing checkbox and click the Options button Check the Share files and folders using SMB checkbox to configure the sharing Note You can create up to 10 hot folders Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions 1 Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box 2 Select the Hot Fol...

Страница 450: ...n the Paper Settings Pan el P 452 5 Make the necessary settings in the Output Settings Pan el P 456 Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 450 ...

Страница 451: ...les and folders using SMB checkboxes to config ure the sharing For Mac OS X v10 7 and later Check the File Sharing checkbox and click the Options button Check the Share files and folders using SMB checkbox to configure the sharing Note If you ve made shared settings when you created a new Hot Folder you do not need to execute steps 8 to 9 Deleting a Hot Folder Deleting a Hot Folder 1 Open the Colo...

Страница 452: ... print conditions in the setting panels within the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box The settings available on each panel are as follows Paper Settings Panel P 452 Output Settings Panel P 456 Color Settings Panel P 458 Paper Settings Panel Paper Settings Panel Easy Settings Advanced Settings Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs The settings available on each mode are...

Страница 453: ...er source Roll Paper Width This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Automatic Cutting You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting The following settings are available for automatic cutting Setting Details Printer Default The value set on the printer operation panel takes priori...

Страница 454: ...nces Suitable for when the printing results are too vivid or when printing scanned images Office Document Suitable for printing handouts as well as general office documents for which print clarity is key Note The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type Print Quality Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed Th...

Страница 455: ...print proofing However this takes more time than regular printing Office Document Prints common office documents such as proposals memos for distribution etc so they are easy to read Note The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type Print Quality Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed The level of the print ...

Страница 456: ...uces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified Input the scaling value in nu merical characters You can specify a range between 5 and 600 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media size the part that does not fit in the media cannot be printed This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless...

Страница 457: ... page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation When the rotated page can fit in the width of roll paper the page is rotated automatically and when it can not fit in the width of roll paper the page is not rotated When Fit Roll Paper Width is selected under Enlarged Reduced Printing then the image is enlarged or reduced after rotating to fit the width of the roll paper Rotate Left 90 Deg...

Страница 458: ...the matching mode Setting Details Driver Matching Mode P 459 Enables printing of optimal color tones using a driver specific color profile You should normally select this mode ICC Matching Mode P 460 Enables color matching using ICC profiles Select this if you want to print by specifying the input profile printer profile and matching method in detail This allows you to use ICC profiles for digital...

Страница 459: ...ng posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Perceptual People Dark Areas Color match...

Страница 460: ...metric 3 Click the Input Profile list and then select an input profile Note To match the color on the printing select the input profile for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy of the Color imageRUNNER type in use 4 Click the Printer Profile list and then select a printer profile Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Col...

Страница 461: ...ng the original and print an enlargement Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer For detailed instructions refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual 1 Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER 2 Press Send to display the screen for transmission 3 Press Favorites and then press the Favorites button ...

Страница 462: ...th a Desired Picture Quality 492 Adjust the Colors and Print 493 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color 493 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 495 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 497 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 498 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 499 Using Adobe CMM 500 Printing an Adjustment Pattern and Selecting Adjustment...

Страница 463: ...e by using the Layout Plug In that is installed at the same time as the Print Plug In for Photoshop See About the Layout Plug In P 520 By using the print history management function you can import past print settings parameters Additionally you can save preferences as a file Note The actual output may differ from the settings in Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional the arrangemen...

Страница 464: ...ware User s Licensing Agreement click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button 6 Select Custom Install to put a checkmark on your Print Plug In then click the Install button Installation Procedures iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 464 ...

Страница 465: ...shop Digital Photo Professional are as follows Uninstall Print Plug In for Photoshop 1 Close Photoshop 2 In Finder display the Print Plugin for iPFxxxx folder 3 Delete the Print Plugin for iPFxxxx folder Note iPFxxxx is the name of your printer Uninstall Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional 1 Perform the installation procedures 1 through 5 iPF6450 Uninstall Procedures User s Guide Mac OS X...

Страница 466: ...ck the Uninstall button 4 To quit another application click on the Continue but ton 5 Click the Quit button Uninstall Procedures iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 466 ...

Страница 467: ...gePROGRAF Print Plug In the latest version of the imagePROGRAF printer driver must be in stalled If the following message is displayed but the Print Plug In window is not displayed open only one Photoshop When Photoshop is running in multiple windows the plug in may not start If the message below is displayed but the Print Plug In window is not displayed convert the color space of the image to eit...

Страница 468: ...In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Main Window The Print Plug In main window consists of the sheet selection area and the preview and button area Sheet Selection Area The tabs used to switch between each sheet on the Print Plug In window are displayed When you select a tab a sheet is displayed The settings available on each sheet are as follows Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Pr...

Страница 469: ...Button Click this button to begin printing QuitButton Click this button to close the Print Plug In window and return to application software Button Click this button to display the Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Help file Maximize Dialog Box button When this button is clicked the Print Plug In main window is displayed enlarged to cover the entire display screen iPF6450 Prin...

Страница 470: ...a checkmark here to only print the selected range Note When you select Preview in the Image then select a portion of the image on the preview display this becomes valid Perform Proof in Preview Place a checkmark here to simulate the colors of the output product in the preview Note If Auto Color is selected under Output Profile some media types are enabled If ICC profile is selected under Output Pr...

Страница 471: ... media type For more information about see Customize Media Settings P 509 Note Always select media type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results Advanced Settings button Click the button to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box For more information about the media detailed sett...

Страница 472: ...es but this mode offers exceptional print ing quality Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode Fast Choose this setting to print faster Printing in fast mode can help you work more efficiently when checking layouts Highest Max No of Passes If you are concerned about uneven colors in ...

Страница 473: ...ctures and drawings Note When the Output Profile you have set is Auto Monochrome Photo or None No Color Correction you cannot se lect a matching method ICC Conversion Options button This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected as the Output Profile When this button is clicked the ICC Conversion Options dialog box is displayed allowing you to configure color conversion related settings Refer t...

Страница 474: ...put Image Size The following settings are available for enlarged reduced printing Setting Details Fit Paper Size This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug In to match the ex port media size when printing Fit Roll Paper Width This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug In to match the width of the roll paper with the width of the ima...

Страница 475: ...center of the selected Paper Size Specify Print Start Position You can print with specifying the top and left printing start positions in From Top Margin and From Left Margin for Paper Size From Top Margin Input the margin from the top of the media in numbers You can input between 9999 and 9999 mm From Left Margin Input the margin from the left of the media in numbers You can input between 9999 an...

Страница 476: ...ngs For more information about the size options see Size Options Dialog Box P 487 Defaults button Click the button to return all of the settings on the Page Setup sheet to their defaults Color Settings Sheet Color Color Settings Sheet Color You can use this sheet to adjust image Color Brightness Contrast Saturation and you can set the color balance of print product more to your liking Note You can...

Страница 477: ...x then set the Channel and other settings For more information about Curves see Curves Dialog Box P 488 Defaults button Click the button to return all of the settings on the Color Settings sheet to their defaults Color Settings Sheet Monochrome Color Settings Sheet Monochrome This screen allows you to adjust settings such as the Color Balance Tone Brightness and Contrast to configure the printing ...

Страница 478: ...d the white parts of the paper Adjustment pattern setting button When this button is clicked the Adjustment pattern setting dialog box is displayed The Adjustment pattern setting dialog box allows you to print an adjustment pattern with adjustment values that vary in steps up and down and to select your preferred adjustment values For details on Adjustment pattern setting see Adjustment pattern se...

Страница 479: ... 518 Setting Details Information Print Position Selects the information print position Top Header Information is printed on the top of the image Bottom Footer Information is printed on the bottom of the image Print History Number Place a checkmark here to print the print history number File Name Place a checkmark here to print the file name Printed at Place a checkmark here to print the time and d...

Страница 480: ...stment pattern images side by side to check the state when changes to adjust ment values are applied The adjustment values of the image enclosed in the blue frame in the center are used as the base values with images arranged around this with the adjustment values varying in steps up and down from these base values If you click any of the images the adjustment pattern is redisplayed with the adjus...

Страница 481: ...Yellow Gray Tone Brightness Contrast or Saturation For monochrome you can select X Color Balance Y Color Balance Tone Brightness Contrast High light Shadow or Tint The icons for Horizontal Axis Adjustment Item are displayed above the preview area and the icons for Ver tical Axis Adjustment Item are displayed on the left of the preview area Note None can only be selected for Vertical Axis in both c...

Страница 482: ...an insert a background between each image The background color can be specified in Pattern Background Pattern Background You can select the background color from White Black and Gray If it is difficult to compare the differences between neighboring adjustment pattern images changing the back ground color may make it easier to compare The Pattern Spacing can be selected if Pattern Background is Ava...

Страница 483: ...saved and the dialog box is closed These setting values are applied the next time the Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional is started Furthermore if you select the Update Base Values in the Color Settings Sheet check box and click the Close button the setting values for the image enclosed in the blue frame in the preview area central image are applied to the settings in the Color...

Страница 484: ...paper Setting Details Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied 3mm Print at a standard size Select for Media Type that has no problem when printing with a standard size margin 20mm Select this when rubbing against the printhead occurs such as when using paper that tends to curl Cut Speed This selects the auto cut speed Setting Details Printer Default The settings of ...

Страница 485: ...Note When Highest Max No of Passes is selected as the print mode High Precision Text and Fine Lines cannot be selected Set Configuration Dialog Box Set Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you click the Set Configuration button on the Main Sheet You can set the adjustment of image sharpness and image enlargement method Sharpen Performs adjustment of the sharpness outline settings ...

Страница 486: ...e in mail box is selected Initialize all warning dialog boxes When this is checked all of the warning dialog boxes that have been set to Do not show this screen again be come displayed ICC Conversion Options dialog box ICC Conversion Options dialog box This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected in the Output Profile list in the Main sheet and the ICC Conversion Options button is clicked Thi...

Страница 487: ...ng settings are available for automatic cutting Setting Details Available Each page is automatically cut after it is printed None Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without interruption Print Cut Guideline A print cut guideline is printed after each page and printing continues without interruption No Spaces at Top or Bottom Conserve Paper When you place a checkmark her...

Страница 488: ...ia size Add button Click the button to register the contents of the settings Curves Dialog Box Curves Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you click the Curves button on the Color Settings Sheet You can set Channel and other settings Channel Select from among RGB Red Green or Blue Note Gray is displayed for monochrome printing and this selection cannot be changed Input Enter an input value Curv...

Страница 489: ...ion about Print History Details see Utilize Print History P 509 Print History Print History appears in list format Display Items Details Print History Number Displays the print history number File Name Displays image file name Printed at Displays time and date of printing Comment Displays comment details Note Up to 200 print history items can be displayed All items above 200 are deleted When you c...

Страница 490: ...ttings Displays the print history settings selected from the Print History or Favorites Setting Details Main When you select this the Main sheet settings are displayed Page Setup When you select this the Page Setup sheet settings are displayed Color Settings When you select this the Color Settings sheet settings are displayed Utilize Three Types of Previews Utilize Three Types of Previews You can ...

Страница 491: ...Printing There is no checkmark in Enlarged Reduced Printing or Scaling has been selected Check the original image with Image Check the original image with Image In the image preview you can check the entire image that you have input Select Image in Preview Note When the cursor appears as a small magnifying glass while there is an Image in the Preview area the Selected Range feature is enabled and ...

Страница 492: ...ith a Desired Picture Quality Print with a Desired Picture Quality You can specify and print at the resolution you desire 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select the media set to the printer in Media Type Note Always select media type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results Check Image with ...

Страница 493: ...printed when processing images in Print Mode Note The settings that can be selected differ by Media Type Input Resolution to Plug in and Input Bit to Plug in selected 6 Click the Print button Printing begins Adjust the Colors and Print Adjust the Colors and Print You can adjust the colors to your liking and print images The explanation below is on 5 ways to adjust the colors using Print Plug In Ad...

Страница 494: ...he direction of Low in Saturation 5 Drag the slide bar in the direction of Warm Black in Gray Tone Note You can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 6 Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plu...

Страница 495: ...the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview The following explanation is about the procedures for adjusting example image below Low for Contrast Light for Highlight Light for Shadow Enhance brightness for the curves The unapplied and the applied images of the above image adjustments are as below 1 Open the Main sheet iPF6450 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome ...

Страница 496: ...rag the slide bar toward Light Note You can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 7 Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 496 ...

Страница 497: ...e to the differences in color on the screen and in the printer In Print Plug In you can get the color balance of the print product closer to the color balance displayed on the screen through performing ICC International Color Consortium color profile settings matching method settings and settings for the internal profile which performs optimum color conversion in response to media and resolution s...

Страница 498: ...t profile and matching method that you have set Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images This prints a high quality Adobe RGB16bit image taken with a high end digital camera Print Plug In allows you to print high color gamut and high tone images when the Adobe RGB16bit image data has been retouched in Photoshop without compromising the level of tone in the ...

Страница 499: ...Click the Print button Printing of the Adobe RGB16bit image begins Prints monochrome photographs with high quality Prints monochrome photographs with high quality Prints images captured with a scanner or digital camera in monochrome with high quality Provides stable monochrome photo images without color casts and minimizes the influences of the difference of the light source 1 Display the Main she...

Страница 500: ... following procedure 1 Open the Adobe website http www adobe com 2 Enter Adobe CMM in the search input box on the screen 3 Search for the Adobe Color Management Module CMM item and select the Macintosh version 4 Download the file by following the on screen directions 5 Start the installer in the downloaded file to perform the installation Adobe CMM System Requirements The system requirements for A...

Страница 501: ...stment Values Since you can print an adjustment pattern and select your preferred adjustment values while comparing the images this allows you to conserve ink and paper and save the time it takes to repeatedly check adjustment results The procedure for displaying and printing an adjustment pattern is as follows 1 Display the Color Settings sheet color or monochrome and set the adjustment values to...

Страница 502: ... OK button 4 Set Rotate 90 degrees Pattern Size Pattern Spacing and Pattern Background as needed 5 For the Paper Source setting select how the paper to print on is to be supplied 6 For the Use Paper Size setting select the paper size to print on 7 Click the Print Adjustment Pattern button The adjustment pattern starts printing 8 Check the image in the adjustment pattern that is closest to the cust...

Страница 503: ...as of images Important In order to make the black point compensation settings effective close down and restart Photoshop or Digital Photo Profes sional Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use black point compensation Refer to Using Adobe CMM P 500 for details on how to install Adobe CMM 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversi...

Страница 504: ... ICC Conversion Options dialog box 5 Configure the Proof Options as needed Note The proof option is Simulate Paper Color 6 Click the OK button to close the ICC Conversion Options dialog box 7 Click the Print button Printing begins Enlarge Reduce and Print Enlarge Reduce and Print You can enlarge or reduce an image in Print Plug In Three methods to enlarge reduce and print are as follows Enlarge Re...

Страница 505: ... Enlarged Reduced Printing 3 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless...

Страница 506: ...edia orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 6 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 7 Select Fit Roll Paper Width 8 Click the Print button The imag...

Страница 507: ...rs on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Scaling and input the scaling factor or drag the four corners of the image in the Preview display Note You can specify scaling rate in intervals of 0 01 You can specify a ...

Страница 508: ...e specified media must be set to the printer 1 Display the Page Setup sheet 2 Select Roll Paper in Paper Source 3 Click the Borderless Printing check box on Note Select the width for roll paper set in the printer in Roll Paper Width in the Specify Roll Paper Width dialog box and click OK 4 Click the Print button Borderless printing begins Print with No Borders iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Softwar...

Страница 509: ...Plug In those settings are saved as print history Also you can export and import as files You can store often used print history under a specified name in print preferences Note You can save up to 200 print history items All items over 200 are deleted in chronological order You can do the following things using print history Confirm Print History Details P 510 Apply Print History to an Image P 511...

Страница 510: ...tory you wish to check the details of from either Print History or Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box 3 Check the print history details in Settings and click the OK button Note You can display the print history details by switching the sheets Confirm Print History Details iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 510 ...

Страница 511: ...pply button Store Print History to Print Preferences Store Print History to Print Preferences You can store often used print history to print preferences Not only can you store the print history stored under a differ ent name in print preferences you can also find it with ease Note You can store up to 200 print history items to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Detail...

Страница 512: ...sh to store in print prefer ences from Print History and click the button 5 In the Add Favorites dialog box input the name of the print history in Name input a comment in Comment and click the OK button 6 Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Store Print History to Print Preferences iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Profess...

Страница 513: ...ry 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to delete from Print History in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button iPF6450 Delete Print History User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 513 ...

Страница 514: ...history stored in print preferences as a file 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to export from Favor ites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Export button Export Print History from Print Preferences iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 514 ...

Страница 515: ...int History to Print Preferences Import Print History to Print Preferences You can import print history in file format and store it to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Click the Import button of the Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box iPF6450 Import Print History to Print Preferences User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Phot...

Страница 516: ...u cannot import a print history file exported from a different OS in Print Plug In You cannot import a print history file exported from a different printer in Print Plug In 5 Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Import Print History to Print Preferences iPF6450 User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 516 ...

Страница 517: ...ory items in print pref erences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to delete from Favor ites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button iPF6450 Delete Print History from Print Preferences User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 517 ...

Страница 518: ...nformation may print on the image data with some media sizes enlargement rates and print position values When Keep Media Size is set to On on the printer a portion of bottom of the print data is not printed 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Print Information check box on 3 Select the position where you wish to print the information in Information Print Position 4 Click the information ...

Страница 519: ...t Comment dialog box and click OK button 7 Click the Print button Comments are printed with images iPF6450 Set Information to Print with Image User s Guide Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 519 ...

Страница 520: ...g In can be printed as is from the Print Plug In for Photoshop For details on the functionality of the Layout Plug In see Layout Plug In Main Window P 520 For details on how to start and how to use the Layout Plug In see Creating and Printing a Layout Image for Mounting on a Frame P 523 Layout Plug In Main Window Layout Plug In Main Window This window is for creating a layout image for finishing a...

Страница 521: ...ion that protrudes past the canvas sides This allows you to prevent white paper from appearing on the canvas sides when mounted The larger the amount of extension the larger the area hidden behind the back surface Important Since values entered in mm or inches are first converted temporarily to pixels and then reconverted to mm or inches values may be displayed that differ from the entered values ...

Страница 522: ...ed the Print Plug In for Photoshop starts To print the created layout image click the Print button in the Print Plug In for Photoshop main window Important When you close the Print Plug In the created layout image is discarded Note If the Print Plug In for Photoshop for multiple different models is installed a screen for selecting the model is displayed when you click the Execute button When you c...

Страница 523: ... the Paper Size List 2 Click the Delete button Note Sizes that have a red circle in the Name cannot be deleted Creating and Printing a Layout Image for Mounting on a Frame Creating and Printing a Layout Image for Mounting on a Frame The procedure for creating and printing a layout image for mounting on a frame is as follows 1 Start Photoshop 2 Open the image to lay out and edit the image in Photos...

Страница 524: ...e created layout image is discarded 6 Mount the printed layout image on the frame Important Fully dry the printed paper before mounting it on the frame Take care when mounting on the frame The ink may peel off if you touch the printed surface Note As you fold the printed paper along the frame the folded areas may crack and reveal the paper underneath depending on the media type You can prevent the...

Страница 525: ...g sheets 557 Output Stacker 570 Media Configuration Tool Windows 573 Media Configuration Tool Mac OS X 605 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Handling and Use of Paper 525 ...

Страница 526: ...in the Paper Reference Guide see Using Paper Other Than Genu ine Paper and feed confirmed Paper P 528 Paper Reference Guide display method You can display the Paper Reference Guide from imagePROGRAF Support Information See Displaying the Paper Reference Guide P 530 Method of Updating Supported Paper Paper supported by the printer may be newly released on the imagePROGRAF website To use newly relea...

Страница 527: ...lowing sizes are supported Paper Sizes Dimensions ISO A1 594 0 841 0 mm 23 39 33 11 in ISO A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 54 23 39 in ISO A2 1 431 8 609 6 mm 17 00 24 00 in ISO A3 1 297 0 420 0 mm 11 69 16 54 in ISO A3 1 329 0 483 0 mm 12 95 19 02 in ISO A4 1 210 0 297 0 mm 8 27 11 69 in ISO B2 500 0 707 0 mm 19 69 27 83 in ISO B3 1 353 0 500 0 mm 13 90 19 69 in ISO B4 1 250 0 353 0 mm 9 84 13 90 in JIS B2 ...

Страница 528: ...d confirmed Paper Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper When using this printer to print on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper use paper that meets the following conditions Note Refer to Paper Reference Guide for details on genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper Refer to Paper Reference Guide Paper where the size is described in Paper Sizes ...

Страница 529: ... recommend that you select one of the following general purpose paper settings or special settings Note For an overview of the media types see Types of Paper P 526 For details on how to select the media type in the control panel and printer driver see Types of Paper P 526 Choosing General Purpose Paper Settings Since these settings anticipate a wide variety of paper other than genuine Canon paper ...

Страница 530: ...proving print quality and feed properties over printing paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper using the general purpose settings This can be expected to improve properties such as print quality because it allows you to configure settings such as the maximum amount of ink to use and the height of the printhead depending on the characteristics of the paper you are using Furth...

Страница 531: ...1 Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock Launchpad in OS10 7 The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed 2 Click the Paper Reference Guide button The Paper Reference Guide is displayed iPF6450 Displaying the Paper Reference Guide User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Paper 531 ...

Страница 532: ...lder than the version released on the imagePROGRAF website download and install the latest version of Media Configuration Tool before installing Media Information File If you do not install the latest version of Media Configuration Tool before installing Media Information File the latest paper infor mation cannot be updated Windows 1 Double click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon iPFxxxx indicates ...

Страница 533: ...eter Unit option Manually 555 Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder When printing on rolls attach the Roll Holder to the roll Rolls have a two or three inch paper core Use the correct attachment for the paper core The printer comes equipped with the 2 Inch Paper Core Attachment installed For borderless printing on A1 594 mm or A2 420 mm rolls attach the included Spacer ...

Страница 534: ... Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Sizes P 526 See Types of Paper P 526 To view instructions as you attach the Roll Holder press the Navigate button See How to View Instructions with Navigate P 649 Follow steps 3 and 4 User s Guide HTML 1 Remove the Holder Stopper from the Roll Holder 2 Insert the attachments for the roll paper on the Roll Holder Using rolls with a 3 inch paper co...

Страница 535: ...eft Insert the roll firmly until it touches the flange a of the Roll Holder leaving no gap Important Always have the Roll Holder resting horizontally when loading rolls Attempting to load rolls with the Roll Holder upright may damage the Roll Holder 4 Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown Push it firmly in until the flange a of the Holder Stop per touches the roll Att...

Страница 536: ...ectrophotometer Unit option is the same as for a printer with no Spectrophotome ter Unit option If it is difficult to perform operations from the front of the printer lower the Up down Unit See Lowering the Up down Unit of the Spectrophotometer Unit option Manually P 555 User s Guide HTML 1 Press the Load button 2 Press or to select Roll Paper and then press the OK button Note If any paper has bee...

Страница 537: ...icult to load rolls from the front of the printer load rolls from the back of the printer If the printer has a Spectrophotometer Unit option lowering the Up down Unit makes it easier to perform operations from the front of the printer See Lowering the Up down Unit of the Spectrophotometer Unit option Manually P 555 5 Insert the edge of the roll in the Paper Feed Slot a and advance the roll until y...

Страница 538: ... roll using the Paper Cutting function if the edge is creased or soiled See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 546 Note Adjusting the printhead alignment with the type of paper to be used in printing may enhance printing quality See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors P 796 Changing the Type of Paper Changing the Type of Paper Follow these steps to change the type of paper s...

Страница 539: ...OK button 5 Press or to select the type of paper loaded in the printer and then press the OK button Important Be sure to select the correct paper type If this setting does not match the loaded paper it may cause feed errors and affect printing quality Note For details on types of paper see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 526 By default Plain Paper is selected Using the Same Type of ...

Страница 540: ...s or to se lect the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Chg Paper Size and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Roll Length and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select the length of paper loaded in the printer and then press the OK button Specify the roll length as fo...

Страница 541: ...ed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Eject Paper and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button The roll is rewound Important If you have selected ManageRemainRoll On in the Control Panel menu a barcode is printed on the leading edge of the roll Do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed You wi...

Страница 542: ...lly P 555 7 Holding the Roll Holder flange a remove the holder from the Roll Holder Slot Note For instructions on removing rolls from the Roll Holder see Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder P 542 8 Close the Roll Feed Unit Cover Note To load new paper in the printer at this point see Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder 1 Remove...

Страница 543: ...move the 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment Spacer for Borderless Printing Remove the Spacer for Borderless Printing from the Roll Holder as shown Important Store the roll in the original bag or box away from high temperature humidity and direct sunlight If paper is not stored properly the printing surface may become scratched which may affect the printing quality when you use it again iPF6450 Removing ...

Страница 544: ... to On in the Paper Menu of the Control Panel will print a barcode with text on the roll when the roll is removed that identifies the type of paper and amount left When ManageRemainRoll is On and you load rolls with printed barcodes the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are loaded The barcode will be cut off after it has been read Important If the barcode on the ...

Страница 545: ...become soiled To wait for the ink to dry without allowing printed documents to fall after printing set Cutting Mode on the menu of the printer to Eject See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 546 Windows 1 Display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu Windows P 185 2 Select the Main sheet and click CAdvanced Settings in AMedi...

Страница 546: ...Unit following printer driver settings Media Menu Pa per Details Various Types of Paper Cutting Mode Automatic Auto Cut See Cut ting Roll Pa per After Printing P 170 Yes Eject Select this to move the cutter by key operation and cut paper Although there are cases with Automatic in which the paper falls and the paper surface is scratch ed you can avoid damaging the paper with this method since you c...

Страница 547: ...ave selected Auto Cut Yes in the printer driver With Eject printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the roll is cut Eject is the preset selection in Cutting Mode for some types of paper For this paper we recommend keeping the preset cutting mode If documents printed using Automatic Eject or manual cutting are short rolls are advanced a specific amount be...

Страница 548: ...s the OK button 6 Press or to select Eject and then press the OK button 7 Print the job When printing is finished the printer will stop without cutting 8 Holding the printed document to prevent it from dropping press the Cut button to cut the roll Manual when using media that cannot be cut with the Cutter Unit 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Paper tab Spe...

Страница 549: ... 5 Press or to select Cutting Mode and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Manual and then press the OK button 7 Print the job The printer stops advancing the paper after printing 8 Press the Feed button Roll paper is fed to the specified cut position and then auto matically stopped 9 Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like iPF6450 Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls Us...

Страница 550: ...on 1 Press the Feed button 2 Press the button to advance the roll to the position for cut ting 3 Press the Cut button 4 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button After the roll paper is cut it is rewound automatically Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls 550 ...

Страница 551: ... See Paper Reference Guide On Input Length The amount to cut from the leading edge of paper is specified in the control panel The amount to cut from the leading edge can be specified in the range of lengths displayed in the control panel The range of lengths differs between each media type Note The amount to cut from the leading edge of paper cannot be set shorter than the length displayed in the ...

Страница 552: ...is from cutting by printing black lines at the leading and trailing edges of documents It may help prevent Printhead damage You can specify for CutDustReduct to be activa ted for particular types of paper Important Do not set CutDustReduct to On for paper that wrinkles easily such as Plain Paper or lightweight paper This may impair cutting and cause paper jams Borderless printing is not available ...

Страница 553: ...rless Printing to the Roll Holder See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 Roll Holder Set RH2 25 Roll Holder for 2 and 3 inch paper cores Attachments Using Rolls with a 2 inch Paper Core Using Rolls with a 3 inch Paper Core Holder Stopper for 2 inch paper cores Holder Stopper for 3 inch paper cores 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment Borderless Printing on A1 or A2 Rolls Spacer for Borderless Printing...

Страница 554: ... of the Roll Feed Unit remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer Installing the Roll Feed Unit Installing the Roll Feed Unit Important Always turn off the printer before attaching the Roll Feed Unit The printer may be damaged if you do not turn it off first Installing the Roll Feed Unit iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls 554 ...

Страница 555: ...photometer Unit option Manually Lowering the Up down Unit of the Spectrophotometer Unit option Manually Lowering the Up down Unit manually before printing makes it easier to handle paper from the front of a printer equip ped with a Spectrophotometer Unit option Note You can also perform operations from the back of the printer without lowering the Up down Unit manually iPF6450 Lowering the Up down ...

Страница 556: ...g down on the Up down Unit handle the central part near the blue label Handling the ends may cause dam age After the paper operations are complete the Up down Unit will automatically return to its original position Lowering the Up down Unit of the Spectrophotometer Unit option Manually iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls 556 ...

Страница 557: ... specified by the print job are shown on the Display Screen 1 Press or to select Load Paper and then press the OK button 2 Load the sheet in the Top Paper Feed Slot or Front Paper Feed Slot depending on the type of paper specified by the print job If a type of paper other than POP Board is selected Loading Sheets in the Top Paper Feed Slot P 558 If POP Board is selected Loading Heavyweight Sheets ...

Страница 558: ...g make sure the sheet is flat against the Paper Tray Cover The sheet may jam if it curls before feeding or printing and the trailing edge drops toward the front Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam If necessary straighten the paper and reload it Load the paper straight Loading paper askew will cause an error Note The loading method for a printer with a Spectrophotometer Unit option is the same...

Страница 559: ...n weight Put your hand under the sheet to support it and prevent it from falling Note If it is difficult to load rolls from the front of the printer load them from the back of the printer If the printer has a Spectrophotometer Unit option lowering the Up down Unit makes it easier to perform operations from the front of the printer See Lowering the Up down Unit of the Spectrophotometer Unit option ...

Страница 560: ... damage the printer One sheet of paper can be loaded at a time Do not load multiple sheets This may cause paper jams Straighten paper if it is warped before loading it Load the paper straight Loading paper askew will cause an error Once you load the paper you cannot shift it sideways Load the paper straight If paper other than POP Board is loaded in the Front Paper Feed Slot you might not be able ...

Страница 561: ...rinter pull up the four Front Tray Guides above the Ejection Guide and press the OK button Note Sufficient space behind the printer is required when loading paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot For details on the installation space required see Specifications P 1034 2 After Open top cover is displayed open the Top Cover iPF6450 Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper H...

Страница 562: ...t level relative to the paper feed slot Failure to do this may scratch the printing surface 4 As you look inside the Top Cover insert the leading edge of the sheet between the Platen and Paper Re tainer a keeping it parallel to the Paper Retainer a and align the paper with the Paper Alignment Line b of the Front Tray Guides Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of P...

Страница 563: ...e print job If no print job was received The printer now starts feeding the paper 6 After printing the printer will temporarily stop advancing the paper while the trailing edge is still in the rollers to prevent the sheet from dropping Once you press the OK button the paper can be removed 7 Remove the sheet keeping the front edge level as you pull it out Important If POP Board is accidentally remo...

Страница 564: ...printer message appears make sure that there is sufficient space behind the printer and press the OK button Note There needs to be sufficient space behind the printer to load paper into the Front Paper Feed Slot For more informa tion on installation space see Specifications P 1034 2 When the Open top cover message appears open the Top Cover Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot iPF6450 User s Guide Hand...

Страница 565: ...r along the guide side of the Up down Unit making sure it is level Important When you insert the paper into the Front Paper Feed Slot keep it level as it goes into the paper feed slot Failure to do so may scratch the printed surface iPF6450 Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets 565 ...

Страница 566: ...en the Platen and the Paper Retainer a and then align it with the orange Paper Alignment Line b Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a or Carriage Shaft b This may stain your hands and damage the printer Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets 566 ...

Страница 567: ...rinting the print job If no print job was received The printer now starts feeding the paper 8 After printing the paper is stopped momentarily with the trailing edge still held in the rollers to prevent it from falling Press the OK button to release the paper 9 Remove the sheet keeping the front edge level as you pull it out Important If POP Board is accidentally removed at an angle it may scratch ...

Страница 568: ...s displayed 3 Press or to select Eject Paper and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button The paper is ejected from the front of the printer Important If the trailing edge of a sheet is not ejected pull the sheet out keeping the front edge level Accidentally removing the sheet at an angle may scratch the printed surface Removing heavyweight sheets from the fro...

Страница 569: ... POP Board is accidentally removed at an angle it may scratch the printed surface 7 Press the OK button Important Always remove the sheet before pressing the OK button If you do not remove the sheet before step 7 it may go back inside the printer leaving roller marks across the trailing edge of paper 8 Lift the four Front Tray Guides above the Ejection Guide store them toward the front and then pr...

Страница 570: ... 2 a is not slanted The Output Stacker can hold one sheet When printing multiple pages remove each sheet after it is printed Use the Output Stacker in the regular position a The stacker may also be used in the extended position b for some types of paper The extended position enables easy removal after printing For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in extended position refe...

Страница 571: ...2 Important The Output Stacker can hold paper up to 36 inches 914 4 mm long The number of sheets that can fit in the Output Stacker is one sheet When printing multiple pages remove each sheet after it is printed Before printing banners or other long documents tap the Output Stacker We recommend that you spread a clean cloth or paper on the floor and select Eject as the cutting method for rolls to ...

Страница 572: ...nables easy removal after printing For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in extended position refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 526 Important When performing color measurement using the Spectrophotometer Unit optional use it in the regular position a Do not use the extended position b Using the Output Stacker iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of P...

Страница 573: ...ewly added to the printer you can add that media type to the printer control panel and printer driver by using the media information file provided by Canon You can customize Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper media information files to create a media in formation file for custom paper paper that is neither Canon genuine paper or feed confirmed paper and add that media type to the printer...

Страница 574: ...ure does not normally need to be performed To install the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software CD ROM such as when you have downloaded a new version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website use the following procedure You must be logged in as Administrator when installing software in Windows 1 Start the Media Configuration Tool installer Click the Next button 2 Th...

Страница 575: ...xt button 4 The Choose Destination Location screen appears Select the destination folder then click the Next button 5 The Ready to Install the Program screen appears Click the Install button iPF6450 Installation Procedures Windows User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Windows 575 ...

Страница 576: ...start menu go to All Programs iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed Media Configuration Tool Main Window Media Configuration Tool Main Window The explanation below is on the Media Configuration Tool main window Note For the step to open the Media Configuration Tool main window see Starting Method P 576 Starting Method Wi...

Страница 577: ...ion button Opens imagePROGRAF Support Information You can check information such as the latest information for the product and software version upgrade information Link to User Manual Button Click this button to display the User s Guide This function requires that the User s Guide be installed on your com puter Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper Editing Media...

Страница 578: ...ver select the paper to delete and click this button For details on the procedure for deleting added media types see Deleting Media Types You Have Added P 583 Show Hide Button To change whether or not genuine paper or feed confirmed paper is displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver select the paper to change and click this button For details on the procedure for changing whether o...

Страница 579: ...ting on the target printer while adding the media types Reinstalling Media Configuration Tool after registering a media information file may delete the registered media information file In this case first download and install latest Media Configuration Tool then download and register the required media information file 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box and then click the Add button Note For d...

Страница 580: ...e OK button Note If Master Media Information File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File the media type display order and media type display non display settings are initialized Reconfigure these after added the master media information file 5 Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed 6 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Adding Media Types Windows ...

Страница 581: ...ou would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer 8 Click the OK button Changing Media Names Changing Media Names 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box see Editing Media Type Information ...

Страница 582: ...Driver and Name on Control Panel are stated below alphanumeric space _ For Name in Printer Driver up to 32 one Byte characters can be entered and for Name on Control Panel up to 16 one Byte characters can be entered 4 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button 5 The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed Configure Update Target and click the Execute button Communication with the pr...

Страница 583: ... the printer 6 Click the OK button Deleting Media Types You Have Added Deleting Media Types You Have Added 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box see Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 577 2 In the Media Type list select the name of the media to delete Click the Delete button Note...

Страница 584: ...iffers from the data to be updated the selected media information file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer 5 Click the OK button Deleting Media Types You Have Added Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configura...

Страница 585: ...e button The selected paper is alternately shown or hidden Note You can select multiple paper The names of media switched for non display appear grayed out in the Media Type list Each time you click the Show Hide button the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel and then to showing only the printer panel 3 In t...

Страница 586: ... that is set to the printer click the Cancel button Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer 5 Click the OK button Changing the Display Order of Media Types Changing the Display Order of Media Types 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box see Editing Media Type In...

Страница 587: ...n with the printer begins Note You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver Important When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated the selected media information file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program i...

Страница 588: ... displayed in Printer in the Select Printer dialog box and then click the Next button Communication with the printer begins The Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box is displayed Note The printer cannot be changed after this Custom paper is paper other than Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper paper that is detailed in the Paper Refer ence Guide Added Custom Paper Added custom paper is disp...

Страница 589: ...s see Edit Custom Paper P 598 Delete Button To delete added custom paper from the printer control panel and printer driver in your computer select the paper to delete and click this button For details on the procedure for deleting custom paper see Delete Custom Paper P 597 Import Button To add custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver by importing a Custom Media Information File...

Страница 590: ...edia types displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver is performed from the Edit Media Types dialog box regardless of whether it is Canon genuine paper or custom paper Refer to Editing Media Type Infor mation for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 577 Compatible Paper Compatible Paper Paper specifications Refer to Specifications and Paper for specifications such as thickness a...

Страница 591: ...d Custom Paper in the Media Configura tion Tool Do not execute printing on the target printer while adding custom paper When adding custom paper check the specifications of paper that can be added using Compatible Paper P 590 1 Open the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box see Using Paper Other than Genuine Pape...

Страница 592: ...et for executing color calibration Auto Adjust cannot be created in the control panel and imagePROGRAF Color Calibration Management Console A calibration target can only be created for exe cuting Auto Adjust High Precision 5 The Step 2 Set the custom paper name dialog box is displayed Enter an arbitrary name to display in the printer control panel and printer driver and then click the Next button ...

Страница 593: ...ipes with different color tones may appear in the printed material Paper feed adjustment does not need to be executed more than once Execute paper feed adjustment only once each time you add a custom paper 9 The Roll Paper Settings dialog box is displayed Note If a paper source other than Roll Paper is selected in the Step 3 Paper Source Settings dialog box this screen is not displayed Configure t...

Страница 594: ...is case select User Cut as the Automatic Cutting Set tings If borderless printing is performed on paper where the ink drying is poor the cutter unit may leave scratches where it touches the printed surface or may not cut correctly In this kind of situation configure the amount of time to wait for the ink to dry after printing using Drying Time Alternatively if the paper cannot be cut well by the c...

Страница 595: ... to test print using Maximum ink usage and the image to use using Image used in test print and then click the Start Print button 12 Determine and set the ink level that is thought to give the best visual test print results with no bleeding or scraping of ink iPF6450 Add Custom Paper Windows User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Windows 595 ...

Страница 596: ...atching Sheet P 193 Depending on the maximum ink usage setting some of the print qualities in the printer driver may become unselect able 13 Configure Head Height and Vacuum Strength as re quired and click the Next button Usually these do not need to be set Important If you set the Head Height lower than the automatically set height in parentheses check that the printhead does not rub against the ...

Страница 597: ...ox that is opened by Add Genuine Paper in the Media Configuration Tool window Delete Custom Paper Delete Custom Paper You can delete custom paper that you have already added from printer control panel and from the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box see Using Pa...

Страница 598: ... details on the procedure for opening the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box see Using Paper Other than Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 588 2 Select the paper you want to edit from the Added Cus tom Paper list and then click the Edit button 3 The View Settings dialog box is displayed Follow the on screen directions and change the set tings as required Note Refer to Steps 5 to 15 of the ...

Страница 599: ...e Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 588 2 Select the paper you want to export to media informa tion file from the Added Custom Paper list and then click the Export button Note You can select multiple paper 3 Specify the location to save the Custom Media Informa tion File Note You can change the file name by selecting and editing the File A Custom Media Information File am1 file is saved The Custom ...

Страница 600: ...dit Custom Paper dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box see Using Paper Other than Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 588 2 Click the Import button 3 Select the Custom Media Information File am1 file to import 4 The Confirm Update dialog box opens Click the Execute button Import Custom Media Information Windows iPF6450 User s Guide H...

Страница 601: ...e The optional spectrophotometer unit is required in order to create a calibration target In order to create a calibration target roll paper of width 406 4 mm 16 00 inches or more is required In order to create a calibration target you need to add the custom paper in advance For details on the procedure for adding custom paper see Add Custom Paper P 591 1 Open the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog ...

Страница 602: ...ated by changing the envi ronment where the printer is located Warnings Warnings Take note of the following warnings when added custom paper other than Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper to the printer driver and the printer itself About the Cutter Depending on the paper there are types that cannot be cut by the cutter unit and types that speed deterioration of the blade and cause damage...

Страница 603: ...alog box If lines are warped or scratched set the Head Height to be lower in the Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog box If the amount of ink used is too much wrinkles may appear and the ink may bleed in the printed material Further more if the amount of ink used is too little color production may be poor and lines may become scratched In this kind of situation change the amount of ink ...

Страница 604: ...ovide an ICC color profile that matches the paper you are using and select that ICC color profile in your soft ware For details on how to specify the ICC color profile in the printer driver see Matching Sheet P 193 Custom paper cannot be used with the ambient light adjustment function or Monitor Matching in Color Matching Method Warnings Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media...

Страница 605: ... paper has been newly added to the printer you can add that media type to the printer control panel and printer driver by using the media information file provided by Canon You can customize Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper media information files to create a media in formation file for custom paper paper that is neither Canon genuine paper or feed confirmed paper and add that media ty...

Страница 606: ...ool without using the User Software CD ROM such as when you have downloaded a new version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website use the following procedure 1 Double click the MCT Installer iPFxxxx for X icon to start the Media Con figuration Tool installer Note The iPFxxxx in the icon will be the printer name in use 2 Input the administrator name and password and click the OK butt...

Страница 607: ...t click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button 6 Select Easy Install then click the Install button 7 Click the Continue button to quit another application iPF6450 Procedures for Installing Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Mac OS X 607 ...

Страница 608: ...figuration Tool The iPFxxxx in the folder above will be the printer name in use Procedures for Uninstalling Procedures for Uninstalling 1 Double click the MCT Installer iPFxxxx for X icon to start the Media Con figuration Tool installer Note The iPFxxxx in the icon will be the printer name in use 2 Input the administrator name and password and click the OK button Procedures for Uninstalling Mac OS...

Страница 609: ...country or territory then click the OK button 4 The License is displayed After you have read Canon Software License Agree ment click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button iPF6450 Procedures for Uninstalling Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Mac OS X 609 ...

Страница 610: ...ll 7 Click the Uninstall button 8 Press the Continue button when another application is running Procedures for Uninstalling Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Mac OS X 610 ...

Страница 611: ...tilities iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool MCTxxxx app Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed Note If a compatible printer driver is not installed the Media Configuration Tool will not start If you attempt to start the Media Con figuration Tool when a printer driver is not installed the warning message below is displayed iPF6450 Starting Method Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of P...

Страница 612: ... Custom Paper button When this button is clicked the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box is displayed which allows you to added custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver You can also create a calibration target for performing color calibration on added custom paper from the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box that opens when you click this button Refer to Using Paper Other tha...

Страница 613: ...Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed Note The printer cannot be changed after this Note Paper that is displayed grayed out does not appear in the printer driver or printer panel Add Button To add genuine paper or feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver click this...

Страница 614: ...ver select the paper to change and click this button For details on the procedure for changing the display order of media types see Changing the Display Order of Media Types P 623 Note The display order for custom paper can also be changed Important When you update the media type information perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer Note It may not be possible to deleti...

Страница 615: ...alog box see Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 613 2 The Add Media Type dialog box displays Click the Browse button 3 Open the folder that contains the media information files amf files iPF6450 Adding Media Types Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Mac OS X 615 ...

Страница 616: ...pe display non display settings are initialized Reconfigure these after added the master media information file 5 Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed 6 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button 7 The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed Configure Update Target and click the Execute button Communication with the printer begins Note You should normally select Updat...

Страница 617: ... is communicating with the printer 8 Click the OK button Changing Media Names Changing Media Names 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box see Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 613 2 In the Media Type list select the name to change Click the Rename button iPF6450 Changing Media Na...

Страница 618: ...dialog box click the Update button 5 The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed Configure Update Target and click the Execute button Communication with the printer begins Note You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver Important When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated the selected media information file is updated When you wou...

Страница 619: ...a Types dialog box see Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 613 2 In the Media Type list select the name of the media to delete Click the Delete button Note Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted iPF6450 Deleting Media Types You Have Added Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Mac OS X 619 ...

Страница 620: ...ffers from the data to be updated the selected media information file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer 5 Click the OK button Deleting Media Types You Have Added Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configura...

Страница 621: ...for display Click the Show Hide button The selected paper is alternately shown or hidden Note You can select multiple paper The names of media switched for non display appear grayed out in the Media Type list Each time you click the Show Hide button the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel and then to showing...

Страница 622: ...r Important When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated the selected media information file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer 5 Click the OK button Switching Media Types Display Show Hide Mac OS X iPF6...

Страница 623: ...or Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper P 613 2 Select the paper in the Media Type list for which to change the display order and then click the buttons to move the item or The selected item moves one line up or down for every button click 3 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button iPF6450 Changing the Display Order of Media Types Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper...

Страница 624: ...e OK button Using Paper Other than Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper Using Paper Other than Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper To add paper other than Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver and export and import the media information file for that paper click the Add and Edit Custom Paper button in the Media Configuration Tool main win...

Страница 625: ... in advance Setting Details Can execute Color calibration Auto Adjust and Auto Adjust High Precision can be executed Only Auto Adjust High Precision al lowed Color calibration Auto Adjust High Precision can be executed Auto Adjust cannot be execu ted Target not registered Color calibration cannot be executed because the calibration target is not registered in the printer Cannot execute Color calib...

Страница 626: ... file for that custom paper from the computer for managing paper and then import it into another computer for use To use a Custom Media Information File am1 file created outside of the network where the target printer is being used first import it into the computer for managing paper If you also want to use it on other computers import and use a Custom Media Information File am1 file newly exporte...

Страница 627: ...ous changes to the standard paper as necessary Important Canon offers absolutely no guarantees regarding the print quality or paper feed properties of customer paper For genuine Canon paper and Canon feed confirmed paper print using the media type as recommended in the Paper Refer ence Guide The print quality and feed properties are not guaranteed if you use Add Custom Paper in the Media Configura...

Страница 628: ... the selected category the Assist button may be disabled Standard paper where Cannot create is displayed in Calibration Target the calibration target for executing color calibration cannot be created in the control panel and imagePROGRAF Color Calibration Management Console For custom paper added using standard paper where Can create for Auto Adjust High Precision is displayed in Calibration Targe...

Страница 629: ...button Important Do not load paper that is curled or that has already been printed on 7 The Step 3 Paper Source Settings dialog box is dis played Select the paper source where the custom pa per is loaded and then click the OK button 8 The Step 4 Paper feed adjustment dialog box is dis played Click the Execute button to execute paper feed adjustment The adjustment pattern is printed and the paper f...

Страница 630: ...inting Configures whether or not to permit borderless printing Permit Borderless printing is permitted Deny Borderless printing is denied Important Depending on the paper there are types that cannot be cut by the cutter unit and types that speed deterioration of the blade and cause damage to the cutter For thick paper hard paper etc do not use the cutter unit and instead cut the roll paper using s...

Страница 631: ...n Printer Driver is selected in the screen in Step 5 you cannot perform test prints or configure the maximum amount of ink to use 11 The Test Print Settings dialog box is displayed Select the print priority and print quality of the test print using Print Priority and Print Quality Set the level to test print using Maximum ink usage and the image to use using Image used in test print and then click...

Страница 632: ...t be configured using the Media Configuration Tool Although the color tone may change when the maximum ink usage is changed at this point you should select the optimal level by only focusing on bleeding and scraping of ink If the color tone needs to be adjusted provide an ICC color profile that matches the paper you are using and select that ICC color profile in your software For details on how to...

Страница 633: ...e help 14 The Step 6 Confirm the settings dialog box is dis played Configure the settings of the custom paper and then click the Next button 15 The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed Confirm the updates and then click the Execute button The custom paper is added to the control panel of the printer and to the printer driver of the PC you are using Important If you have added custom paper with t...

Страница 634: ...utton Note You can select multiple paper 3 The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed Confirm the updates and then click the Execute button The custom paper is deleted from the control panel of the printer and from the printer driver of the PC you are using Edit Custom Paper Edit Custom Paper You can change the settings of custom paper you have already added 1 Open the Add and Edit Custom Paper di...

Страница 635: ...o file and save media information about custom paper that you have added The saved Custom Media Information File can be used by importing it into another printer or PC Refer to Import Cus tom Media Information P 636 for details on importing custom media information 1 Open the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box Note For details on the procedure for opening the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box...

Страница 636: ...ion target has been created the calibration target information is also exported to the file Import Custom Media Information Import Custom Media Information You can import a Custom Media Information File that has been saved in a folder and add the file to the printer control panel and to the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog box Note For details on t...

Страница 637: ...e Custom Media Information File am1 file to import 4 The Confirm Update dialog box opens Click the Execute button iPF6450 Import Custom Media Information Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media Configuration Tool Mac OS X 637 ...

Страница 638: ... The optional spectrophotometer unit is required in order to create a calibration target In order to create a calibration target roll paper of width 406 4 mm 16 00 inches or more is required In order to create a calibration target you need to add the custom paper in advance For details on the procedure for adding custom paper see Add Custom Paper P 627 1 Open the Add and Edit Custom Paper dialog b...

Страница 639: ...ted by changing the envi ronment where the printer is located Warnings Warnings Take note of the following warnings when added custom paper other than Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper to the printer driver and the printer itself About the Cutter Depending on the paper there are types that cannot be cut by the cutter unit and types that speed deterioration of the blade and cause damage ...

Страница 640: ...log box If lines are warped or scratched set the Head Height to be lower in the Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog box If the amount of ink used is too much wrinkles may appear and the ink may bleed in the printed material Further more if the amount of ink used is too little color production may be poor and lines may become scratched In this kind of situation change the amount of ink u...

Страница 641: ...vide an ICC color profile that matches the paper you are using and select that ICC color profile in your soft ware For details on how to specify the ICC color profile in the printer driver see Matching Sheet P 193 Custom paper cannot be used with the ambient light adjustment function or Monitor Matching in Color Matching Method iPF6450 Warnings Mac OS X User s Guide Handling and Use of Paper Media...

Страница 642: ...iPF6450 User s Guide 642 ...

Страница 643: ...nd Use of Paper 525 Control Panel Operations and Display Screen 644 Printer Menu 653 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Control Panel 643 ...

Страница 644: ...cels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period d Navigate button Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or printheads as well as other operations See How to View Instructions with Navigate P 649 e Arrow buttons button Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab In menu items requiring numerical input press this b...

Страница 645: ...hod for Rolls P 546 j Feed button Pressing this button when rolls are loaded enables you to reposition the paper See Feeding Roll Paper Manual ly P 544 k Load button Press this button when loading or replacing paper See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 See Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot P 557 l Cut Sheet lamp green Lit when Tray or Front Paper Feed Slot is selected as the paper source m Roll Me...

Страница 646: ... printer status and shows menu names Bottom line displayed Here the remaining ink level is indicated See Checking Ink Tank Levels P 925 Job tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to print jobs Pressing the OK button when this tab is high lighted will display the Job Menu menu Top line displayed The job icon is highlighted Middle line displayed Indicates the printer status and shows ...

Страница 647: ...rs Sleep mode to conserve power when idle for a specific period by default five minutes that is if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu See Menu Set tings P 663 After entering Sleep mode from Standby mode the printer automatically recovers if print jobs are received and ...

Страница 648: ...owever it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed or when a roll can be manually advanced by pressing the Feed button 2 When the printer is in Sleep mode you can press any button except the Power button to recover from Sleep mode Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI Display Transitions in Error Status The display transit...

Страница 649: ...four seconds within each tab How to View Instructions with Navigate How to View Instructions with Navigate You can refer to instructions for loading paper replacing ink tanks and performing other operations on the printer con trol panel 1 Press the Navigate button 2 Press or to select the desired navigation menu 3 Press or to select View Op Guide and then press the OK button Instructions are now d...

Страница 650: ...Example Loading sheets How to View Instructions with Navigate iPF6450 User s Guide Control Panel Operations and Display Screen 650 ...

Страница 651: ...How to view instructions Once you complete an action described in the instructions the printer detects the action and switches to the next in struction screen In the case of actions the printer cannot detect instruction screens are switched every four seconds and the sequence of operations is shown repeatedly iPF6450 Checking Instructions During Printer Operations User s Guide Control Panel Operat...

Страница 652: ...s the button to pause the instructions on the current screen Press the or button to display the previous or next screens If you do not press the or button within 30 seconds continuous display is resumed Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step Checking Instructions During Printer Operations iPF6450 User s Guide Control Panel Operations and Display Screen 652 ...

Страница 653: ...operations to manage print jobs Set Adj Menu Menu operations for printer adjustment and maintenance For a description of specific menu items available see Menu Settings P 663 For instructions on selecting menu items see Menu Operations P 654 Note By default menu settings apply to all print jobs However for settings that are also available in the printer driver the values specified in the printer d...

Страница 654: ...n the Ink tab is selected and the OK button is pressed Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button Simply press buttons on the Control Panel to access menus on various tabs from the Tab Selection screen and set or execute Menu items The following section describes menu operations Accessing menus P 654 Specifying menu items P 655 Specifying numerical values P 656 Executi...

Страница 655: ...layed at left next to the second and subsequent rows To access the lower menus select the menu and press the OK button Specifying menu items Menu items can be set as follows 1 Press or to select the desired setting and then press the OK button After two seconds the display reverts to the upper level menu Note If a confirmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered press the OK but...

Страница 656: ...ously 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to complete the settings and then press the OK button Note If a confirmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered press the OK button The setting is applied and the printer is now in Standby Executing menu commands Menu commands can be executed as follows 1 Press or to select the action to execute and then press the OK button The menu command is now e...

Страница 657: ... is not displayed during printing First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Load Paper Roll Paper Manual Paper Eject Paper Chg Paper Type 1 Roll Paper The paper type is displayed here 1 Manual Paper Chg Paper Size Manual PaperSize The size of paper is displayed here 2 CustomPaperSize Set the length and width Roll Length 3 Set the length ManageRemainRoll Off On Paper Details The...

Страница 658: ... 5 see Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 546 Ink Menu First Level Rep Ink Tank Head Cleaning A Job Menu First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Print Job Job List Choose a print job Delete Preempt Jobs 1 Stored Job Mailbox List Enter a password if one has been set Job List Print Delete Print Job List Job Log Choose from information about the latest three print jobs Do...

Страница 659: ...st HiPrc 14 Auto Adjust ColorCheck Print 14 Pattern Size 14 Standard Large Calibration Log Date Paper Type Adjustment Type Use Adj Value Disabled Enabled Set Exec Guide Off On Return Defaults Maintenance Head Cleaning Head Cleaning A Head Cleaning B Nozzle Check Replace P head Printhead L Printhead R Repl maint cart Head Info Printhead L ProductName s n Days elapsed Count Mdot Printhead R ProductN...

Страница 660: ...PServer NPrinter AppleTalk 8 On Off Ethernet Driver 8 Auto Detect 8 On Off Comm Mode 6 8 Half Duplex Full Duplex Ethernet Type 6 8 10 Base T 100 Base TX 1000 Base T Spanning Tree 8 Not Use Use MAC Address 8 xxxxxxxxxxxx Interface Print 8 Return Defaults 8 System Setup Sleep Timer 11 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 40 min 50 min 60 min 210 min Shut Down Timer Off 5 min 10 min 30 min 1 hour 4 hour...

Страница 661: ...cy Standard 1 page Warning Off On Use RemoteUI 8 On Off Reset PaprSetngs 8 Erase HDD Da ta High Speed 8 Secure High Spd 8 Secure 8 Output Method Print Print Auto Del Save Box XX Print After Recv Off On Common Box Set 4 8 Print Print Auto Del Show Job Log 8 Off On Prep MovePrinter Admin Menu 9 Change Pass word 9 The screen for setting the password is displayed Init Admin Pswd 9 Adj Fine Feed 12 13 ...

Страница 662: ...s 9 Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only 10 Not displayed if IPv6 Support is Off 11 Default setting for the time to enter the power save mode Sleep mode is recommended 12 Displayed as the menu during printing while printing is in progress 13 Not displayed in the regular menu 14 This is displayed when the Spectrophotometer Unit optional is mounted Menu Structure iPF6450 Use...

Страница 663: ...he printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left Choose Off if you prefer not to print the barcode See Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left P 544 Paper Details The type of paper is displayed here 1 Head Height Adjust the Printhead height See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images P 801 Skew Check Lv If you print on Japanese paper washi or other handmade ...

Страница 664: ... leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge Note that if you choose 3mm it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy The printed surface may be scratched and ink may adhere to the leading edge It may also cause the Platen to become soiled NearEnd Sht Mrgn Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better print...

Страница 665: ...inting results Print Start Time Indicates when the print job was started Print End Time Indicates when the print job was finished Print Time Indicates the time required to print the job Output Img Size Indicates the image size in the print job Media Type Indicates the type of paper in the print job Paper Consumed Indicates the total amount of paper consumed Paper Length Indicates the length of pap...

Страница 666: ... and size amount of ink consumed and so on Ink consumption indicates a rough estimate of the amount of ink consumed per print job 1 Menu Map Print the menu structure Adjust Printer Head Posi Adj Standard An adjustment pattern is printed and the print position is auto matically adjusted to fix misaligned printing Select Standard if vertical lines in printed material are warped or colors are out of ...

Страница 667: ...nsate for paper stretching or shrinkage after which you enter the amount of adjustment See Adjusting Line Length P 808 B Standard Draft Change Settings A High Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority Adj Prior ity Print Length Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper Enter either the adjustment results from AdjustmentPrint or the discrepancy that you ...

Страница 668: ...tion adjustment value in print jobs However printer driver settings are given priority Choose Enabled OK to apply the color calibration adjust ment value in print jobs However printer driver settings are given priority Set Exec Guide If you select On a message is displayed on the control panel at the timing recommended for executing color calibration Return Defaults Clear the color calibration adj...

Страница 669: ...nnect via IPv6 IPv6 StlessAddrs Specify whether a IPv6 stateless address is used DHCPv6 Specify whether DHCPv6 settings are used DNS Set tings DNS Dync up date Statefull Addr Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automati cally Stateless Addr Pri DNS SrvAddr Specify the DNS server address Sec DNS SrvAddr DNS Host Name Specify the DNS host name DNS Domain Name Specify the DNS domain na...

Страница 670: ...he remaining amount of roll paper Tot Print Area and so on Detect Mismatch Specify printing behavior if the type and size of paper specified in the printer menu does not match the type and size in the printer driver Choose Pause to have printing paused under these circum stances Choose Warning to continue printing after notifica tion Choose None to continue printing without notification Choose Hol...

Страница 671: ...teUI Choosing Off prohibits access from RemoteUI Settings can only be configured from the control panel Reset PaprSetngs Restores settings that you have changed with Media Configu ration Tool to the default values Erase HDD Da ta High Speed Erases file management data for print job data stored on the printer s hard disk See Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk P 689 Secure High Spd Overwrites t...

Страница 672: ...ose OK to restore the Admin Menu password to the de fault values Adj Fine Feed 3 4 Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority Adj Prior ity Automatic or Print Quality Fine tune the feed amount manually Printer Info 3 Paper Info Indicates the current paper size type and related printer set tings Ink Info Indicates ink levels and maintenance cartridge capacity Head In fo Printhead L Indicates in...

Страница 673: ...ess the Menu button 3 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 4 Press or to select Test Print and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Status Print and then press the OK button Checking the information in Status Print reports The following information is included in Status Print reports Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print Printer model Firm Firmware version Boot Boot ROM ver...

Страница 674: ...e check settings Frequency Warning Use RemoteUI Settings used by RemoteUI Output Method Print job settings Print After Recv Common Box Set Show Job Log Adjust Printer Adjustment settings Head Posi Adj A counter for maintenance purposes Head position adjustment values for previous jobs Adjust Log Calibration Color calibration settings Calibration Log Common Calibration A record of when common calib...

Страница 675: ...IFE TTL LIFE ROLL LIFE CUTSHEET MEDIA 1 7 OTHER NAME TTL ROLL CUTSHEET AFTER INSTALLATION DUTY Counters for maintenance purposes Needed when service is re quested UNIT m2 UNIT sq f UNIT A4 Sheet UNIT Letter Sheet Set Adj Menu Settings and adjustment information Adjust Printer Adjustment settings Calibration Color calibration settings Calibration Log Unique Calibration A record of when unique calib...

Страница 676: ...ed 4 Press or to select Test Print and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Interface Print and then press the OK button Confirming Interface Print information The following information is included in the Interface Print report Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Interface Print Printer model Firm Firmware Version Boot Boot ROM Version MIT DBF MIT Database Format Version MIT DB MIT Database Versio...

Страница 677: ... Stateful Address Prefix Length Primary DNS Server Address Secondary DNS Server Address Use a stateless address Stateless Address 1 Prefix Length 1 Stateless Address 2 Prefix Length 2 Stateless Address 3 Prefix Length 3 Stateless Address 4 Prefix Length 4 Stateless Address 5 Prefix Length 5 Stateless Address 6 Prefix Length 6 Use a link local Address Link Local Address Prefix Length Use a manual a...

Страница 678: ...n Bindery PServer File Server Name Print Server Name Print Server Password Polling Interval RPrinter Print Server Name Printer Number NDS PServer Tree Name Context Name Print Server Name Print Server Password Polling Interval NPrinter Print Server Name Printer Number AppleTalk Phase Type AppleTalk settings val ues Name Network Number Zone Network Interface Physical Interface Network interface set ...

Страница 679: ...Use of Paper 525 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts Printer parts 680 Hard Disk 687 Optional accessories 691 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Printer Parts 679 ...

Страница 680: ...e Top Paper Feed Slot See Paper Feed Slots P 683 c Roll Feed Unit Load rolls in this unit You can also load sheets manually d Roll Feed Unit Cover Open this cover to load rolls See Inside the Roll Feed Unit Cover P 684 e Control Panel Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status See Control Panel P 644 f Ejection Guide Supports output paper g Output Tray Front Paper Feed Slot...

Страница 681: ... a USB cable to this port The printer is compatible with Hi Speed USB connections b LAN connector Gigabit Ethernet Connect a LAN cable to this port c Power Supply Connector Connect the power cord to this connector d Carrying Handles 5 When carrying the printer hold it by these handles under both sides iPF6450 Back User s Guide Printer Parts Printer parts 681 ...

Страница 682: ...he edges of paper during borderless printing f Cleaning Brush When cleaning inside the printer under the Top Cover use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen Also use the brush to move the blue Switch on the Platen g Linear Scale The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position Be careful not to touch this part when clean ing inside the Top Cover or clearing paper j...

Страница 683: ...eed Slot Output Tray When loading a heavyweight sheet insert it here All printed documents are ejected from this slot e Front Tray Guides Lift all of the guides before printing on heavyweight paper When feeding heavyweight paper rest the sheet on these guides align it to the right and insert the leading edge up to the Paper Alignment Line f Paper Alignment Line Load heavyweight sheets parallel to ...

Страница 684: ...a Roll Holder Load the roll on this holder b Holder Stopper Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part c Roll Holder Slot Slide the Roll Holder into this slot Carriage Carriage Inside the Roll Feed Unit Cover iPF6450 User s Guide Printer Parts Printer parts 684 ...

Страница 685: ...s equipped with ink nozzles It serves a key role in printing c Printhead Fixer Lever Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover Do not open this part except during Printhead replacement Ink Tank Cover Inside Ink Tank Cover Inside a Ink Tank Cartridges of ink in various colors iPF6450 Ink Tank Cover Inside User s Guide Printer Parts Printer parts 685 ...

Страница 686: ... installed or the ink level detection function is off Flashing Slowly Not much ink is left Flashing Rapidly Ink tank is empty d Ink Color Label Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label Vents Vents There are vents at three positions of the printer as shown on top 1 on the right 2 and on the bottom on the right 3 Important Do not block these vents Also avoid setting paper or ot...

Страница 687: ...x Yes No No No Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box No No No Yes Save print jobs sent from sources other than the printer driver No No No Yes Operations with saved jobs Print saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes Delete saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes Job queue management Display job queue No Yes Yes Yes Delete No Yes Yes Yes Preempt Jobs No Yes Yes Yes Operations with held jobs No Yes Yes Yes Mail box manageme...

Страница 688: ...anel press or to se lect the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select HDD Information and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI To view the box list select Stored Job in Job Management On the Stored Job page the free hard disk space is shown in the upper right corner when boxes are listed ...

Страница 689: ... Disk When erasing all data on the hard disk choose from the following three options This operation is only available from the Control Panel Erasure Method Details High Speed Erases file management data for print job data stored on the printer s hard disk Choose this method for relative ly fast erasure Because only the file management data is erased the print job data itself is not erased Note tha...

Страница 690: ...eue Additionally print jobs are not processed during execution of Erase HDD Data 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select System Setup and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Erase HDD Data and ...

Страница 691: ...rinter Stand ST 28 For more information on the main parts of the Stand refer to see Stand Parts P 692 Important Always unlock the locking casters before moving the Stand by moving the switch to OFF Accidentally moving the Stand while the locking casters are locked may scratch the floor Note For instructions on installing the Stand refer to the instructions provided with the Stand iPF6450 Stand Use...

Страница 692: ...sing the Output Stacker P 571 and the Output Stacker Precautions P 570 c Locking Caster A locking caster that when the switch is in the ON position immobilizes the printer d Accessory Pocket Store printer manuals assembly tools and other items in this pocket Spectrophotometer Unit Spectrophotometer Unit This printer can be used with the following Spectrophotometer Unit Stand Parts iPF6450 User s G...

Страница 693: ...P 694 Spectrophotometer Unit Parts 2 P 695 Note For instructions on installing the Spectrophotometer Unit refer to the instructions provided with the Spectrophotometer Unit For more information on managing colors with the Spectrophotometer Unit refer to see Managing Colors P 820 iPF6450 Spectrophotometer Unit User s Guide Printer Parts Optional accessories 693 ...

Страница 694: ...s the Spectrophotometer Carriage for safety purposes Open this cover to replace the Spectropho tometer Sensor and perform other tasks d White Black Backing Plate Provides a backing either white or black for color measurement See Switching the White Black Backing Plate Optional Color P 837 e Spectrophotometer Eject Guide Supports output paper The White Black Backing Plate attaches to this guide f P...

Страница 695: ...t fixes the White Calibration Tile in place d Spectrophotometer Sensor Cover Open this cover to replace the Spectrophotometer Sensor e Spectrophotometer Sensor Reads the colors of color measurement patterns f Mini USB Connector Connects the cable for transmitting data read by the Spectrophotometer Sensor g Power Supply Connector Connects the Spectrophotometer Sensor to a power supply iPF6450 Spect...

Страница 696: ...iPF6450 User s Guide 696 ...

Страница 697: ... Network Setting Network Environment 698 Using RemoteUI 701 Initial Settings 703 NetWare Settings 710 Mac OS X Settings 718 Other Settings 724 Device Setup Utility Windows 727 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Network Setting 697 ...

Страница 698: ...008 x64 Windows 7 x64 Mac OS X v10 3 9 or later Note When using IPv6 you must specify IPv6 on the Control Panel or in RemoteUI For instructions Configuring TCP IPv6 Network Settings P 706 or see Configuring the Printer s TCP IP Network Settings With RemoteUI P 707 The imagePROGRAF printer driver is supported in Mac OS X v10 5 8 or later The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with Unix P...

Страница 699: ...e specifications of the network interface see Specifications P 1034 Example of a Windows network In Windows networks print over TCP IP Note NetBIOS is not supported Example of a Macintosh network In Macintosh networks print over TCP IP using the Bonjour Zeroconf function Note The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleTalk iPF6450 Network Environment User s Guide Network Setting N...

Страница 700: ... is a NetWare server in your network environment you can use it in conjunction with TCP IP or AppleTalk In this case complete the settings for each protocol you will use Network Environment iPF6450 User s Guide Network Setting Network Environment 700 ...

Страница 701: ...t You Can Do With RemoteUI With RemoteUI you can access the printer via a network configure network settings and display the current status of the printer various types of information the processing status of jobs etc Starting RemoteUI Start RemoteUI by the following operations 1 Start your Web browser 2 Enter the following URL in Address or Location http printer IP address or name Example http xx...

Страница 702: ... sure the DNS settings are correctly configured Depending on the network environment you may not be able to start RemoteUI Confirm whether System Setup Use RemoteUI is set to On on the Control Panel of the printer Note RemoteUI also offers many other features You can display the ink levels check error messages and other status information and cancel print jobs By factory default the English screen...

Страница 703: ...ss Using ARP and PING Commands P 704 Important If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer s IP address printing may no longer be possible after the printer is turned off and on This is because an IP address different from before has been assigned Thus when using DHCP server functions consult your network administrator and configure the settings in one of the following ways Co...

Страница 704: ...n or to increase or decrease the value continuously Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your network 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to complete the settings and then press the OK button 11 Press the Menu button If you have changed the settings a confirmation message is displayed Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Important Be s...

Страница 705: ...ng command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses arp s IP address the printer s MAC address you have verified Example arp s xxx xxx xxx xxx xx xx xx xx xx xx Note In Mac OS X when using Terminal enter the arp command in the format arp s xxx xxx xxx xxx xx xx xx xx xx xx For details refer to the help file for the command line 4 Execute the followi...

Страница 706: ... can also configure IPv6 StlessAddrs and DHCPv6 from the printer Control Panel The DNS can also be configured from the printer Control Panel Configuring the Printer Driver Destination Windows Configuring the Printer Driver Destination Windows This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer s IP address is changed or if you will use the printer over a network conne...

Страница 707: ...nter over a network connection instead of via USB connection If you switch to printing in a TCP IP network or if the printer s IP address is changed see Configuring the Destina tion in TCP IP Networks P 718 If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network see Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network P 719 Configuring the Printer s TCP IP Network Settings With RemoteUI Configuring the Printer ...

Страница 708: ...e IP address of the primary DNS server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server 0 0 0 0 DNS Host Name Specify the printer host name up to 63 characters 1 63 characters Use single byte letters numbers and hyphens Do not use numbers or for the first char acter or for the last character NB 18GBipxxxxxx DNS Domain Name Specify the printer domain name up t...

Страница 709: ...rver Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server Use the same host name and domain name as IPv4 Activate when using the same DNS host and domain names as for IPv4 Off DNS Host Name Specify the printer host name up to 63 characters 1 63 characters Use single byte letters numbers and hyphens Do not use num bers or for the first character or for the last character ...

Страница 710: ...Ware client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network and log in to the NetWare server or tree For instructions on connection refer to the NetWare and operating system documenta tion 5 Install the printer driver Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer to be used for printing When installing the printer driver cho...

Страница 711: ... Utility see Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility P 727 Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 1 Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 2 In the list of printers select the printer to configure 3 Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu 4 Click the NetWare tab and select the frame type in the NetWare Frame Type list iPF6450 Specifying the Printer s Frame T...

Страница 712: ...teUI 6 Click Set 7 Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed 8 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Specifying the frame type using the printer Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed Specifying th...

Страница 713: ...displayed check the settings and correct any invalid values To cancel this process press the Back button Specifying NetWare Print Services Specifying NetWare Print Services Before printing in a NetWare network you must configure print services such as print servers print queues and so on You can configure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following Novell software provide...

Страница 714: ...e printer mode is used 1 Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights and then start NWADMIN 2 Run Quick Setup 1 Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu 2 Enter a desired name in Print Server Name To use an existing print server click the button at right and choose the name from the list 3 Enter a desired printer name in Name 4 To use the printer in queue server mode cho...

Страница 715: ...sition to Manual Load 2 Press the Esc key 3 After the confirmation message is displayed choose Yes and press the Enter key 5 Set a password 1 In Available Options select Print Servers and press the Enter key 2 Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key 3 Select Password and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box 4 Enter the password and press the Enter ...

Страница 716: ... by Server Bindery PServer File Server Name Specify the name of a file server that has a NetWare print server 0 47 characters Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetWare print server 0 47 characters Print Server Pass word Set a password for the print server 0 20 characters Polling Interval Specify the interval to confirm jobs 1 15 seconds 5 RPrinter Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW...

Страница 717: ...ber enter the same printer number specified in Specifying NetWare Print Serv ices P 713 If you have selected NDS PServer Queue Server Mode Using an NDS Print Server 1 In Tree Name and Context Name enter the tree and context name of the print server 2 In Print Server Name enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare Print Serv ices P 713 3 In Print Server Password enter the pass...

Страница 718: ...Follow these steps to configure the destination when using the printer in a TCP IP network Important If you use the printer in a TCP IP network make sure the printer s IP address is configured correctly See Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel P 703 1 Navigate to Applications Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup and double click imagePROG RAF PrinterSetup app 2 Click Nex...

Страница 719: ... printing to a printer on other network groups that require a router for connection Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network For information about network settings ask your network administrator By default Bonjour is activated on the printer You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI For instructions on changing it see Using R...

Страница 720: ...inter to register and click Next 4 Complete Printer Name and Location as desired and click Register 5 Click Finish Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Network Setting Mac OS X Settings 720 ...

Страница 721: ...select Interface Setup and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select AppleTalk and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select On and then press the OK button 6 Press the Menu button If you have changed any settings a confirmation message is displayed In this case press the OK button Important Be sure to complete step 6 This will activate the values you have entered Note By using RemoteUI yo...

Страница 722: ...tp printer IP address or name Example http xxx xxx xxx xxx 2 Select Administrator Mode and click Logon 3 If a password has been set on the printer enter the password 4 Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page 5 Click Edit in the upper right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk Protocol Settings page 6 Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items ...

Страница 723: ...printer By default the network interface name is Canon NB 18GB xxxxxx Here xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer s MAC address 2 If zones have been created on the network enter the name of the printer s zone If there are no zones leave the asterisk entry for the default zone as it is If you enter a network zone name that does not match created zones the printer will not be detec ted by Maci...

Страница 724: ...curity as you complete these settings Security setting items are displayed when you click the Change Password button in the Security group Device Information Settings Item Details Default Setting Device Name Enter a device name 0 32 characters blank Location Enter the location where the device is installed 0 32 characters blank Administrator Enter the administrator s name 0 32 characters blank Pho...

Страница 725: ... Press or to select Comm Mode and then press the OK button 8 Press or to select the communication mode and then press the OK button The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu 9 Press or to select Ethernet Type and then press the OK button 10 Press or to select the Ethernet type and then press the OK button The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu 11 Press or to select Spanning Tree and...

Страница 726: ...I to restore the network settings to the default values as follows Important Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer s IP address As a result the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure For instructions on reconfiguring the IP address see Configuring the IP Address on the Printer P 703 For details on RemoteUI see Using ...

Страница 727: ... Device Setup Utili ty For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD ROM provided with the printer as follows 1 Insert the User Software CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 2 On the Setup Menu window click Install Individual Software...

Страница 728: ...l 6 Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button 7 Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed 8 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Note To configure the IP address automatically choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select DHCP BOOTP or RARP You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device ...

Страница 729: ...nment select On in Stateless Address Additionally when there is an DHCPv6 compatible server in the network environment select On in DHCPv6 Note When there is no IPv6 compatible router or DHCPv6 compatible server select On in Manual and enter the IPv6 Address and Prefix Length 7 Click Set 8 Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed 9 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility iPF6450 Configu...

Страница 730: ...iPF6450 User s Guide 730 ...

Страница 731: ...ts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management Status Monitor Windows 732 Printmonitor Mac OS X 735 Accounting Windows 738 Basic Print Job Operations 752 Advanced Print Job Operations 774 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Print Job Management 731 ...

Страница 732: ...ed to your computer and printers found on the network If a printer error occurs you can investigate the corrective action immediately Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor Displays the ink level of every color in the printer An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels are low The type of paper loaded in each media source is identified You can also check t...

Страница 733: ...e Pausing Resuming Print Jobs Selecting a print job and clicking the Pause button pauses printing of the selected job To resume printing of a paused print job select the print job and click the Resume button Note Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer the job can no longer be paused resumed Canceling Print Jobs Selecting a print job and clicking the Cancel Job button ...

Страница 734: ...ng behavior when the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer can be changed by using Detect Mismatch in the operation panel menu Refer to Menu Settings P 663 for details Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Status Monitor Windows 734 ...

Страница 735: ...ou desig nate in advance You can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk Note If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor select the printer again as follows 1 Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port 2 In the Printer menu select the name of the desired printer After the printer is detected the...

Страница 736: ... job and click the button Note Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer the job can no longer be paused resumed Canceling Print Jobs Selecting a print job and clicking the button cancels printing of the selected job Note You cannot cancel other users print jobs Printing Held Jobs Printing of the job with a Status of Holding is paused because the paper specified by the d...

Страница 737: ...rinting without changing the paper in the printer select the held job and click Continue to print button iPF6450 Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor User s Guide Print Job Management Printmonitor Mac OS X 737 ...

Страница 738: ...nted from each printer who printed them and when Calculation of the Total Pages Used and the Total Cost This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of pages printed the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs Job logs can be automatically collected periodically Exporting Print Job Data Thi...

Страница 739: ...d status bar Title Bar This displays the printer model its serial number and the port number it is using Menu Bar Allows you to select the menu options required for operation Toolbars Provide tool buttons and pull down menus for the main operations Note You can opt to either show or hide the toolbars in the View menu Listed Job Selection Area You can use this area to select which job log is displa...

Страница 740: ...741 Note You can change the items that are displayed and the display order using the Advanced Display Settings dialog box The Advanced Display Settings dialog box can be displayed by selecting Advanced Display Settings from the Show menu Totals Area Displays the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed Note If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs selectin...

Страница 741: ...s displayed when the print process was executed and Cancel is displayed if the print process was not execu ted Media Type This is the type of paper used in printing Output Image Size The size of the image used for printing Note If the job has multiple pages the size of the last page is displayed Paper Consumed The area of paper used for printing Note The Paper Consumed may differ from the product ...

Страница 742: ...unit cost is not set is displayed Total of Other Costs The total value of costs other than paper and ink Ink Cost Details The cost of each ink color Ink Consumption Details The amount of each color of ink used Accounting Manager Basic Procedures Accounting Manager Basic Procedures The first time you use the Accounting Manager use the following procedures to configure the settings 1 Configure unit ...

Страница 743: ...Select Unit Costs in the Settings menu to open the Unit Costs dialog box Configure the unit cost settings in this dialog box Note When you select a job and then open the Unit Costs dialog box items with unit costs that have not yet been configured for that job are shown highlighted Setting the Unit Cost for Ink P 743 Setting the Unit Cost for Paper P 744 Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than ...

Страница 744: ...e Tank Capacity and corresponding Price 3 Click the Overwrite button 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the inks 5 Click the OK button Important Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button Setting the Unit Cost for Paper Setting the Unit Cost for Paper Opens the Paper sheet This sheet is used to configure the unit cost of paper Setting the Unit Cost for Paper iPF6450 User s Guide Print ...

Страница 745: ...s dialog box 3 Enter the Roll Paper Width and Length of the paper as well as the Price for the configured length 4 Click the Add button to return to the Paper sheet 5 To change the unit cost of a media type that has already been configured click the Overwrite button 6 Click the OK button Important If you do not set the standard prices you cannot set the price for each roll paper If the Roll Paper ...

Страница 746: ... 3 Use Allocated to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job 4 Click the Add button To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set click the Overwrite but ton 5 Click the OK button Important Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button Note You can set unit costs for up to 5 items Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Pap...

Страница 747: ... Paper Width Use this to select the unit used for paper width Paper Length Use this to select the unit used for paper length Area Display Format Use this to select the unit used for paper area Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals This feature collects print job logs from the printer at regular intervals and saves th...

Страница 748: ...a on the left side of the window Jobs on Printer This shows a list of the print jobs currently held on printers You can change the number of jobs displayed per page using the Print Jobs Shown Per Page setting in the View menu or the toolbar You can skip to a particular page using the Go to option in the View menu or the toolbar Note For printers with built in hard disks you can view up to 500 prin...

Страница 749: ...he Regularly Acquired Jobs period Displaying the Job properties Dialog Box Select a job from the job list and then select Show Job Properties from Job properties in the File menu You can also select multiple jobs at once Note You can also display the dialog box by selecting a job right clicking it and then selecting Show Job Properties or by using the icon in the toolbar Displaying the Period Prop...

Страница 750: ...ists the unit costs for items such as the selected ink and paper You can copy text based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button Save Unit Cost Data Select a destination folder using Save Unit Cost Data in the File menu The unit cost data for items such as the selected ink and paper is saved as a file Load Unit Cost Data Selecting Load Unit Cost Data in the File...

Страница 751: ...y clicking the Copy button Note Up to 7 types of media are listed in order of the amount consumed The total consumption for other media types is shown as Other iPF6450 Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed User s Guide Print Job Management Accounting Windows 751 ...

Страница 752: ...lify reprinting if any errors occur If errors occur in the middle of printing as when paper runs out you can resume printing after clearing the error without resending the print job from a computer Streamline printing work Without using a computer you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity You can also select multiple print jobs to print during the same period This enables unatten...

Страница 753: ...e set for the shared mailbox Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here but they will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations If there are more than 100 jobs queued and saved in the shared mailbox combined If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs for which you have selected Print in Output Meth od in Windows or Send job to in Mac OS X are ...

Страница 754: ... driver Note Printing from the following software also enables you to save print jobs on the printer s hard disk Windows Print Plug In P 255 Mac OS Print Plug In P 462 Configuring the Printer Driver in Windows 1 Access the Page Setup sheet Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 754 ...

Страница 755: ...ion with Print You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle Note Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display personal box names in the Mail box list as acquired from the printer 4 In Name of data to be saved specify how to name saved print jobs To use the file name choose Use file name Otherwise choose Enter nam...

Страница 756: ...ent title enter a name to identify saved print jobs Note If printed from Free Layout or Preview the Document title is saved under the name imagePROGRAF 2 Select the personal box number in the Mail box list 3 Click OK to close the Destination dialog box Print after reception is complete This option is available in combination with Print You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when ...

Страница 757: ...ted can be deleted from the job queue Preempting other jobs You can preempt other jobs by printing jobs that are currently being received or prepared for processing first Note For information on managing jobs being held see Managing Pending Jobs Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold P 759 Using the Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Job tab Note If...

Страница 758: ...button 2 Press or to select the job to print first and then press the OK button 3 Press or to select Preempt Jobs and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page For details refer to the RemoteUI help Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows Manage jobs as needed on the Job sheet For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Managing the Jo...

Страница 759: ...ng as you do not manage held jobs from the Control Panel imagePROGRAF Status Monitor or imagePROGRAF Print monitor they will remain in the job queue In this case the printer processes the next job in the queue without pausing To print held jobs replace the loaded paper with the paper specified in the print job See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 See Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot P 557 Using t...

Страница 760: ...button If you choose Delete Press or to select Yes or No and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Manage jobs as needed on the Job sheet For details see Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor P 733 Managing Pending Jobs Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold iPF6450 Use...

Страница 761: ... from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and image PROGRAF Printmonitor Using the Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button iPF6450 P...

Страница 762: ...utton 6 Press or to select the saved job and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select Print and then press the OK button 8 Specify the number of copies and press the OK button Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Resume Printing Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Oper...

Страница 763: ... and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set iPF6450 Printing Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 763 ...

Страница 764: ...w long it took to finish printing one copy during the previous print job If you change the value in Copies the printing time indicates the time it took to print one copy during the previous print job multiplied by the number of copies For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Printing Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 764 ...

Страница 765: ...sk pane click by Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number 2 Select the saved job and click Resume Printing iPF6450 Printing Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 765 ...

Страница 766: ...Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the box number in the range 00 29 and then press the OK button Note Enter a password if one has been set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK butt...

Страница 767: ...e choose the mail box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Delete For details refer to the RemoteUI help file iPF6450 Deleting Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 767 ...

Страница 768: ... click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 In the Documents dialog box select the print job and click Delete For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Deleting Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 768 ...

Страница 769: ...e Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number 2 Select the print job and click the Delete button For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file iPF6450 Deleting Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 769 ...

Страница 770: ...nitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Important Jobs stored in the shared mailbox may be automatically deleted under some conditions To prevent jobs from being deleted move them from the shared mailbox to personal boxes See Using the Printer Hard Disk P 752 Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Move Document ...

Страница 771: ...tion mail box list and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set iPF6450 Moving Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 771 ...

Страница 772: ...lect the destination personal box and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Moving Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 772 ...

Страница 773: ...er 2 Select the print job and click Move 3 In the Move Document dialog box select the destina tion personal box and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file iPF6450 Moving Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations 773 ...

Страница 774: ...ut Method and Print After Recv settings in the Control Panel menu Important Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function Specifying Output Method In Output Method specify how to manage jobs regarding printing and saving them Print Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed This is the default format Print Auto Del Save print ...

Страница 775: ...Press or to select Print After Recv and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select On or Off and then press the OK button Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box Jobs sent from a computer for which you have selected Print in Output Method in Windows or Send job to in Mac OS X in the printer driver are saved in the shared mailbox See Using th...

Страница 776: ...es After you set a password it will be required to modify the personal box settings as well as to display print delete move and modify jobs saved in the personal box This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Note By default no passwords are set for personal boxes A password cannot be set for the shared mailbox Enter a four digit number as the...

Страница 777: ...or Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select the personal box and click Open 2 In the Documents dialog box click Settings 3 In the Settings dialog box specify the password and click OK Set password Select the check box iPF6450 Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 777 ...

Страница 778: ...Macintosh 1 On the Hard Disk pane click by Inbox No Name Select a saved job in the list and click Set 2 In the Settings dialog box specify the password and click OK Set password Select the check box Password Enter the password This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001 9999 Verify Re enter the password to confirm it Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Ma...

Страница 779: ...to personal boxes This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the personal box Note Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box 2 Click Edit iPF6450 Naming Personal Boxes User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 779 ...

Страница 780: ...s refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select the personal box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box Naming Personal Boxes iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 780 ...

Страница 781: ...K For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Select a saved job in the list and click Set iPF6450 Naming Personal Boxes User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 781 ...

Страница 782: ...x as follows These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and image PROGRAF Printmonitor Using the Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job ...

Страница 783: ...e OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set Jobs saved in the box are listed For details refer to the RemoteUI help iPF6450 Displaying a List of Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 783 ...

Страница 784: ...ick Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Jobs saved in that box are displayed in the Documents dialog box For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Displaying a List of Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 784 ...

Страница 785: ...ved Jobs Printing a List of Saved Jobs The list of print jobs stored on the printer s hard disk saved jobs can be printed by box as follows 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed iPF6450 Printing a List of Saved Jobs User s Guide Print ...

Страница 786: ...Details of Saved Jobs Displaying Details of Saved Jobs Details of print jobs stored on the printer s hard disk saved jobs can be displayed as follows This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Details Displaying Det...

Страница 787: ...to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set iPF6450 Displaying Details of Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 787 ...

Страница 788: ...dialog box is displayed For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Displaying Details of Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 788 ...

Страница 789: ...d on the printer s hard disk saved jobs can be renamed as follows This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Details iPF6450 Renaming Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 789 ...

Страница 790: ...ox enter the name and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Renaming Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 790 ...

Страница 791: ...ialog box enter the new name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name iPF6450 Renaming Saved Jobs User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 791 ...

Страница 792: ...digit number 2 Select the print job and click Set 3 In the Settings dialog box enter the new name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Renaming Saved Jobs iPF6450 User s Guide Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations 792 ...

Страница 793: ... Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjustment for high precision printing 794 Adjusting the Printhead 796 Adjusting the feed amount 803 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 ...

Страница 794: ...he Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 3 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 4 Press or to select Adjust Printer and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Head Posi Adj and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Standard and then press the OK button A test pattern is printed for adjustment This process will take about 13 minutes Note If standard...

Страница 795: ...west 2 Execute Standard in Head Posi Adj Note If paper rubs against the Printhead or becomes jammed during Printhead height adjustment try selecting a higher level in Head Height and performing Standard again iPF6450 Enhancing Printing Quality User s Guide Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjustment for high precision printing 795 ...

Страница 796: ... Printhead P 800 If adjusting the printhead position has not been performed such as due to an error during initial setup If Rep P head Print in the Control Panel menu is set to Off and adjusting the printhead position has not been performed when replacing the printhead Paper rubs against the printhead or image edges are blurred Selecting Head Height in the Control Panel menu and changing the print...

Страница 797: ...r text at high precision on glossy or semi glossy photo or proofing paper See Enhancing Printing Quality P 794 Items to Prepare When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254 0 mm 10 00 in wide When Using Sheets Standard Six sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or one sheet when using A2 Simple One sheet of unused paper A4 Letter size Perform adjustment as follows 1 Load paper Loading Rolls on the ...

Страница 798: ...per or if printing is not improved after Standard try Manual Manual adjustment requires you to examine the printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value Note We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment If the printhead position was not adjusted during initial setup or when the printhead was replaced execute Initial adjustmt See Adjustment When Installing the Printhe...

Страница 799: ...cute Standard once See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors P 796 8 Press or to select D and then press the OK button 9 Press or to select D 1 and then press the OK button 10 Examine adjustment test pattern D 1 and determine the number with straight lines Note If two patterns seem equally good and you cannot decide which one is better choose an intermediate value For example choose ...

Страница 800: ...When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254 0 mm 10 00 in wide When Using Sheets Seven sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or one sheet when using A2 Perform adjustment as follows 1 Load paper Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot P 557 Important Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified on the print...

Страница 801: ...mportant Paper rubbing against or becoming caught on the Printhead may jam or result in printed documents that are soiled Note Raise or lower the printhead depending on the nature of the problem See Paper rubs against the printhead P 988 See The edges of the paper are dirty P 988 See Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs P 992 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or t...

Страница 802: ...timal level before printing ac counting for the ambient temperature and humidity When a setting other than Automatic is used that value will always be applied Depending on the type of paper some setting values may not be available Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images iPF6450 User s Guide Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead 802 ...

Страница 803: ...ment Method Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method There are two methods of adjusting the paper feed amount Print Quality and Print Length either of which will be applied during printing Since the method that is applied during printing is determined from the value of the Adj Priority setting configure the Adj Priority to match the print target Print Quality Adjusts the feed amount to reduce ban...

Страница 804: ...to GenuinePpr Use this mode with paper identified in the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 526 Auto OtherPaper Use this mode with paper not in the Paper Reference Guide or if Auto GenuinePpr does not eliminate banding See Types of Paper P 526 Important Adjustment is not possible with Auto GenuinePpr and Auto OtherPaper when using highly transparent media In this case use Manual adjustment...

Страница 805: ...riority and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Adj Quality and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select Auto GenuinePpr or Auto OtherPaper and then press the OK button A test pattern is printed for adjustment Adjustment is now finished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger 8 If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto OtherPaper a confirmatio...

Страница 806: ... P 536 Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot P 557 Important Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings 2 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 3 Press the OK button The...

Страница 807: ... adjustment value is now registered and adjustment is complete Fine Tuning the Paper Feed Amount Fine Tuning the Paper Feed Amount If the contrast is uneven or banding in different colors appears at 50 mm 2 0 in intervals in printed documents try executing Adj Fine Feed during printing to fine tune the feed amount Note The Adj Fine Feed menu is only displayed during printing Additionally it is dis...

Страница 808: ...inting application A High This setting is applied when Highest quality or High is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver B Standard Draft This setting is applied when Standard or Fast is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver Note We recommend executing the adjustment if you have changed the paper type or paper size Always check the Adj Priority values before using Adjust Length ...

Страница 809: ...f it is longer use a negative value The feed amount can be adjusted in 0 02 increments Adjusting Color on the Trailing Edge of Sheets Adjusting Color on the Trailing Edge of Sheets If printed sheets are affected by banding in different colors by the trailing edge about 20 30 mm 0 8 1 2 in from the edge try adjusting the feed amount of the trailing edge of sheets Important This adjustment is only p...

Страница 810: ... and then press the OK button C2 is displayed on the Control Panel 8 Examine test pattern C2 Again determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable Press or to select this pattern number and then press the OK button The adjustment value is now registered and adjustment is complete Note If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you can not decide which one is better choose an i...

Страница 811: ...ton Note When VacuumStrngth is set to Automatic the setting value selected for the previous print job is displayed to the right of Automatic once you select the type of paper currently supplied However the value is cleared when the printer is turned off or the paper is replaced 5 Press or to select VacuumStrngth and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the desired setting value and then p...

Страница 812: ...iPF6450 User s Guide 812 ...

Страница 813: ...arts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management Monitor Matching 814 Color Calibration 820 Color Calibration Management Console Windows 846 Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 883 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Color Management 813 ...

Страница 814: ...hat they more closely match the colors displayed on the monitor is called monitor matching Using this mode requires adjustment or configuration of the settings of your monitor the source application the file for printing and the printer driver Important Monitor matching may not be applied or these settings may not be configurable or adjustable depending on your monitor and the source application P...

Страница 815: ...r Matching using the Matching Method and then select the Monitor White Point that you set up in monitor calibration In Color Space select the color space used when displaying the file in the source application Note To print multiple times using the same value we recommend opening the Printer Driver dialog box from the System menu and configuring the appropriate settings See Accessing the Printer D...

Страница 816: ...non Premium Glossy Paper 2 280 5 ClickDAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 6 In FPrint Quality click High 7 Click Color in theGColor Mode list 8 ClickHColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Monitor Matching 816 ...

Страница 817: ...s Mac OS X By calibrating your monitor and configuring settings in the source application in advance you can complete settings to print in colors that are as close as possible to the colors displayed on the monitor Important Before using this feature you must calibrate the monitor and configure settings in the source application See Printing Im ages to Match Monitor Colors P 814 1 Choose Print in ...

Страница 818: ...e Canon Premium Glossy Paper 2 280 5 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 6 In FPrint Quality click High 7 Click Color in the HColor Mode list 8 Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Monitor Matching 818 ...

Страница 819: ...nitor Matching 12 In CColor Space select the color space used when displaying the file in the source application 13 In DMonitor White Point select the white point set on the monitor 14 Click OK 15 Confirm the print settings and print as desired iPF6450 Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors Mac OS X User s Guide Color Management Monitor Matching 819 ...

Страница 820: ...gement of the color calibration logs of multiple printers Color management that can be performed using the Spectrophotometer Unit optional Using the optional Spectrophotometer Unit allows you to perform higher precision color calibration compared to the sensor built into the printer It also has a built in function for self diagnosing variations in color tones from measured values color check Color...

Страница 821: ...r Unit optional together with the included MCT When you have a Calibration Target it allows you to execute color calibration even on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed certified paper Since you can execute color calibration on the paper you are using this efficiently reduces variations in the color tones of the printing In order to create a Calibration Target for paper other than genuin...

Страница 822: ...g color managed support the calibration link function For a detailed explanation see the following Managing Colors Using Printer Sensors P 825 Color Management Using the Spectrophotometer Unit Optional P 829 When using paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed certified paper You can also reduce the variations in printed color tones when using paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed cert...

Страница 823: ...a progress bar This allows you to manage color efficiently because you can visually check roughly how long until color calibration is executed next For a detailed explanation see the following Managing Colors Using Printer Sensors P 825 Outputting Color Measurement Data for Creating ICC Profiles If you want strict color management using paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed certified paper...

Страница 824: ... the Printer Sen sor P 826 Color calibration using the Spectrophotometer Unit Can exe cute Cannot ex ecute Color Calibration Using the Spectrophotometer Unit option P 833 Expanding the range of paper that supports color calibra tion Can exe cute Cannot ex ecute Paper that can be used in Color Calibra tion P 839 Managing Color Precision Using Color Check Can exe cute Cannot ex ecute Color Checks Us...

Страница 825: ...s of printers remotely by using the Color Calibration Management Console CCMC color management utility If the printer is connected to a network execution can be managed remotely from the computer Since this allows the color management status of printers to be centrally managed it delivers efficient low cost color management Color Calibration Using the Printer Sensor Although there are slight diffe...

Страница 826: ...X P 605 Things That Can Be Done Using CCMC You can execute the following functions by using the CCMC color management utility For a detailed explanation see the following Color Calibration Management Console Windows P 846 Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X P 883 Remotely Executing Color Calibration You can remotely execute color calibration from a remote location Displaying the Advisabi...

Страница 827: ... under the same settings When the Execution Guide is displayed Specifying Execution Guide P 828 Executing Color Calibration from the Control Panel on the Printer Execute color calibration from the Control Panel on the printer as follows Refer to the information on Color Calibration Management Console operations when executing color calibration from the computer See Executing Color Calibration Wind...

Страница 828: ...ow to Check How to Operate Confirm it on the Control Panel of the printer From Set Adj Menu select Adjust Printer Calibration Calibration Log See Menu Settings P 663 Print information about the printer From Set Adj Menu select Test Print Status Print See Status Print P 673 Confirm with imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows On the Information sheet of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor click the View Calibr...

Страница 829: ...ectrophotometer Unit optional allows you to perform higher precision color calibration than the sensor built into the printer For a detailed explanation see the following Color Calibration Using the Spectrophotometer Unit option P 833 Managing Color Precision Using Color Check Color check prints and automatically measures the colors of a test pattern and calculates the color difference from a Cali...

Страница 830: ...t a Spec trophotometer Unit mounted 1 Register the media information using Add Custom Paper 2 Add the Calibration Target information in Create Calibration Target to the created custom paper 3 Save as a Custom Media Information File that contains the Calibration Target 4 Add the Custom Media Information File to a printer 12 color model that supports calibration link without a Spectrophotometer Unit...

Страница 831: ... for acquiring color measurement data P 844 Using the Spectrophotometer Unit option Using the Spectrophotometer Unit option This section provides practical examples of using the Spectrophotometer Unit to execute color calibration and make printer adjustments Items to Prepare Printer Spectrophotometer Unit Paper that can be used for color calibration Note Make sure that your paper can be used for c...

Страница 832: ...er performs color measurement and automatically sets the adjustment value Note For details see Color Calibration Using the Spectrophotometer Unit option P 833 Executing Color Calibration from the Computer With the Color Calibration Management Console you can execute color calibration from the computer via the same process outlined above For details refer to the Color Calibration Management Console...

Страница 833: ...ght correct adjustment may not be possible Recommend Timing for Color Calibration We recommend color calibration in the following situations After initial printer installation After Printhead replacement If colors seem different from before despite using the same printing environment under the same conditions To ensure uniform colors when printing on multiple printers however be sure to use the sa...

Страница 834: ... OK button 5 Press or to select AutoAdjst HiPrc and then press the OK button After the environment measurements and paper are confirmed and color calibration is executed the adjust ment value is set automatically Applying Calibration Adjustment Values During Printing The application of the calibration adjustment values when printing can be set in the printer driver or on the menu of the Control Pa...

Страница 835: ...PROGRAF Status Monitor Windows im agePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh RemoteUI and or the Color Calibration Management Console If you enable this function an Execution Guide is displayed in the following cases When a new Printhead has been installed When a certain amount of printing has been executed after color calibration is executed When the data of color calibration has been initialized To enabl...

Страница 836: ...or Check The types of paper that can be used in Color Checks are the same as those that can be used in Au toAdjst HiPrc using the Spectrophotometer Unit See Paper that can be used in Color Calibration P 839 2 Load the paper See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Note If Adj Quality has not been executed even once on the paper you are using execute Adj Qua...

Страница 837: ...management functions Detailed execution information Execution instructions from the computer Multiple printer management For details refer to the Color Calibration Management Console instructions See Color Calibration Management Console Windows P 846 See Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X P 883 Switching the White Black Backing Plate Optional Color Switching the White Black Backing Plat...

Страница 838: ...ate meet 4 Hold the end of the White Black Backing Plate attached to the Spectrophotometer Eject Guide and move it in the direction of the arrow to release it Important When handling the White Black Backing Plate do not touch the white backing plate a or black backing plate b directly with your hands If the surface becomes dirty or scratched the printer may not be able to obtain the correct color ...

Страница 839: ...stalled The Adjustment Types during the execution of Auto Adjust on the Printer Sensor The Adjustment Types during the execution of AutoAdjst HiPrc on the Spectrophotometer Unit Japan Asia Oce ania EU North or South America Opaque Paper 120 Not available Available Not available Common calibration Unique calibration HW Coated Available Available Available Common calibration Ex HW Coated Available N...

Страница 840: ... available Not available Available Cannot execute Wat Res Art CVS Not available Available Not available Cannot execute Graphic Canvas Not available Not available Available Cannot execute ArtMatte Canvas Not available Available Available Cannot execute Canvas Matte2 Available Not available Available Cannot execute 1 The RIP software is required Note If the paper you are using is not specified in me...

Страница 841: ...formation select Paper Details on the Control Panel menu The following is displayed in the Calibration field Display Meaning Standard Supports color calibration using the printer sensor High Precision Supports color calibration using the Spectrophotometer Unit OK Common Executes Unique calibration OK Unique Executes Unique calibration N A Color calibration cannot be executed N A Colorime try Only ...

Страница 842: ... color calibration on each media type If color calibration is executed on paper categorized as Common calibration dedicated calibration adjustment val ues are set on the media type that Common calibration was executed on Furthermore calibration adjustment values are set on all print qualities for all media types where color calibration has not been executed Note The calibration adjustment values a...

Страница 843: ...olor calibration was executed the last time are applied when printing The currently applied calibration values can be checked using the Color Calibration Management Console or Control Panel menu How to Check How to Operate Displayed Content Check in the Color Calibration Manage ment Console Win dows Display the Paper Status dialog box and view the Type See Calibration Sheet Windows P 858 Auto Adju...

Страница 844: ...ot available Available Not available Hi Res BarrierP Not available Available Not available Hi Res Gra P Not available Available Not available Matte Photo Available Available Available GlossyPhoto 170g Available Available Available SatinPhoto 170g Available Available Available GlossyPhotoHG170 Available Not available Not available SemGlsPhotoHG170 Available Not available Not available GlossyPhoto 2...

Страница 845: ...eArt Txtr Available Available Available FA Enha V 225 Not available Available Available FA Enha V 255 Not available Available Available HW Art Paper Available Available Available Ex HW Art Paper Available Available Available Wat Res Art CVS Not available Available Not available Graphic Canvas Not available Not available Available ArtMatte Canvas Not available Available Available ArtSatin Canvas No...

Страница 846: ...ecute color checks on printers that have a spectrophotometer unit installed Display Color Calibration Status Execute Color Calibration Acquire Color Measurement Data Execute Color Check Display Color Calibration Status The printers connected via the network and USB are displayed in a list in the main window If there are multiple printers printers where color calibration has been executed on the sa...

Страница 847: ...executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected Execute Color Check You can execute a color check When a color check is executed a built in pattern is printed the color difference from a calibration target registered in the printer is calculated and the check results are displayed Execute a color check when you want to check the color status of a printer in detail F...

Страница 848: ...onsole 4 Click the Next button 5 After reading the license agreement select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click the Next button Installation Procedure Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 848 ...

Страница 849: ...sole on the Desktop click the Yes button 9 Select Yes I want to restart my computer now or No I will restart my computer later and click the Fin ish button To complete the installation of the Color Calibration Management Console restart your computer iPF6450 Installation Procedure Windows User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 849 ...

Страница 850: ...ibration Management Console 2 Select Remove and click the Next button 3 Click the Finish button This completes the uninstallation of the Color Calibra tion Management Console Startup Startup The startup procedure for the Color Calibration Management Console is as follows Double click the Color Calibration Management Console icon on the desktop Uninstallation Procedure Windows iPF6450 User s Guide ...

Страница 851: ...heet and Color Measurement sheet You can switch between the Calibration sheet and Color Measurement sheet by clicking the ACalibration button or BColor Measurement button You can also switch between the sheets from the File menu in the menu bar Title bar Displays the model name port name and installation location of the printer selected in the Printer list Menu bar Allows you to select the menu it...

Страница 852: ...hen the Color Measurement Sheet is Displayed P 855 Help Menu P 856 Printer List Displays a list of printers that can be controlled For details see Printer List P 857 Main Window Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 852 ...

Страница 853: ... Sheet This sheet allows you to acquire color chart measurement data and execute color check For details see Color Measurement Sheet P 860 Note Enabled when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected iPF6450 Main Window Windows User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 853 ...

Страница 854: ... For details on Status Monitor see The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor P 732 Accounting You can start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Accounting Manager main window for the printer selected in the Printer list allowing you to confirm information such as the cost of printing For details on the Accounting see Accounting Manager P 738 Preferences Displays the Preferences dialog box This allow...

Страница 855: ...ses automatically Calibrated All Custom Paper Selects the paper types displayed in the main window Calibration sheet Paper Status Displays the Paper Status dialog box This allows you to check the color calibration and color check execution logs for the selected paper Update Refreshes the paper list in the main window with the latest information Tools Menu When the Color Measurement Sheet is Displa...

Страница 856: ...log box closes automatically Favorites Displays the Favorites Management dialog box This allows you to check the execution logs registered in the favorites Log Details Displays the Execution Log Details dialog box This allows you to check the details of the execution log selected in Execution Logs in the main window Save Data Displays the Output Color Measurement Data dialog box This saves the col...

Страница 857: ...nagement Console Printers where the printer driver is installed Printer If color calibration is executed on the paper being fed printers that are being fed the same paper are displayed under the Calibration group is displayed on printers that have a message related to color calibration is displayed on printers where the spectrophotometer unit is installed Double click the printer name to display t...

Страница 858: ...atus Monitor see The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor P 732 Accounting button Click this button to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Accounting Manager main window for the selected printer allowing you to confirm information such as the cost of printing For details on the Accounting see Accounting Manager P 738 Calibration Sheet Calibration Sheet This sheet allows you to execute color c...

Страница 859: ...tton to refresh the list with the latest information is displayed on the paper currently being fed in the printer The paper types displayed in the list are as follows When Calibrated is selected Paper types that are registered in a printer where color calibration has been executed are displayed When All is selected Paper types registered in a printer are displayed When Custom Paper is selected Pap...

Страница 860: ...cuting color check see Executing Color Check P 873 Execution Logs Displays the execution logs of acquiring color measurement data is displayed on the paper being fed The name registered in the favorites is displayed in Name Save Data button Click this button to display the Output Color Measurement Data dialog box This saves the color measurement data from the selected execution log on the computer...

Страница 861: ...2 Select the printer you want to check the color calibra tion status of from the Printer list Note If there are multiple printers printers that have the same paper type loaded and where color calibration has been executed on that paper are displayed in the same calibration group iPF6450 Checking the Color Calibration Status Windows User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console...

Страница 862: ...t of the Calibration sheet 4 Select Calibrated and click the button 5 Check the color calibration logs in the lower part of the Calibration sheet Checking the Color Calibration Status Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 862 ...

Страница 863: ...ed even once on the paper you are using when you execute Auto Adjust High Precision execute Adj Quality in the control panel menu See Automatic Banding Adjustment P 804 3 If a spectrophotometer unit is mounted select the White Black Backing Plate color We recommend white See Switching the White Black Backing Plate Optional Color P 837 Note For the color of the White Black Backing Plate continue us...

Страница 864: ...er you want to execute color calibration on from the Printer list 3 Click the Calibration button Executing Color Calibration Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 864 ...

Страница 865: ...printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected Pattern Size You can select this setting when Auto Adjust High Precision is selected in Color Calibration Type We recommend Larger when you want to prioritize the color measurement precision Note Enabled when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected 5 Click the OK button iPF6450 Executing Color Calibration Win...

Страница 866: ...or Measurement Data For Any Color Chart The procedure for printing a color chart measuring the colors and saving the color measurement data on a computer is as follows The color measurement data saved on the computer can be used such as for creating ICC profiles ICC profiles are created using commercially available software Created ICC profiles can be used by the printer driver See Matching Sheet ...

Страница 867: ...lder P 533 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Note If Adj Quality has not been executed even once on the paper you are using execute Adj Quality in the control panel menu See Automatic Banding Adjustment P 804 3 Select the White Black Backing Plate color See Switching the White Black Backing Plate Optional Color P 837 Acquiring Color Measurement Data 1 Open the Color Measurement sheet iPF6450 ...

Страница 868: ...3 Click the Color Measure button 4 Check the color chart measurement procedure in the procedure description window and then click Start Acquiring Color Measurement Data For Any Color Chart Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 868 ...

Страница 869: ...his check box allows you to conserve paper by reducing the gap between the pieces of a color chart when the chart is printed split into pieces Media Type Select the type of paper Print Priority Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing For details on the settings see Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 63 Print Quality Choose the print...

Страница 870: ...s dialog box has elapsed color measurement proceeds without performing any further drying with the venti lation fan Specify a time that offers sufficient drying by air drying in the Preferences dialog box If you perform color measurement while the ink is not dry the measurements may not be correct The Preferences dialog box is displayed when you click Preferences in the File menu If the number of ...

Страница 871: ...he Preferen ces dialog box has elapsed color measurement proceeds without performing any further drying with the ventilation fan Specify a time that offers sufficient drying by air drying in the Preferences dialog box If you perform color measurement while the ink is not dry the measurements may not be correct The Preferences dialog box is displayed when you click Preferences in the File menu If t...

Страница 872: ... is selected we recommend that you set the Time longer and the Airflow stronger compared with when Standard is selected because of the larg er distance between the ventilation fan and paper 8 The View Settings window is displayed Check the de tails of the settings and click the OK button Note Click the Add to Favorites button to display the Add to Favorites dialog box which allows you to add the s...

Страница 873: ...r Check When a color check is executed a built in pattern is printed the color difference from a calibration target registered in the printer is calculated and the check results are displayed Note This step can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected When printing the color check adjustment pattern the calibration adjustment values are applied even if Use...

Страница 874: ...nter you want to execute the color check on in the Printer list 2 Click the Settings button for Color Check in the Print er Information dialog box Executing Color Check Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 874 ...

Страница 875: ...r P 536 Note If Adj Quality has not been executed even once on the paper you are using execute Adj Quality in the control panel menu See Automatic Banding Adjustment P 804 3 Select the White Black Backing Plate color See Switching the White Black Backing Plate Optional Color P 837 Note For the color of the White Black Backing Plate select the color from when color calibration was executed using th...

Страница 876: ... displayed Select Pattern Size To increase the precision of the color check we recom mend that you configure the same settings as when Auto Adjust High Precision was executed in color calibration See Executing Color Calibration P 863 Executing Color Check Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 876 ...

Страница 877: ...t the color check in the middle by clicking the Cancel button However it may take some time to end 8 Check the results Note We recommend that you execute color calibration if the results exceed the threshold values See Executing Color Calibration P 863 iPF6450 Executing Color Check Windows User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 877 ...

Страница 878: ...p can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected You can register up to 30 execution logs in the favorites 1 Select the execution log to register in favorites in Exe cution Logs in the main window Color Measurement sheet 2 Click the Log Details button 3 Click the Add to Favorites button in the Execution Log Details dialog box Registering Execution Logs in Fa...

Страница 879: ...te Acquire Color Measurement Data execution logs from the favorites Note This step can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected 1 Click the Favorites button in the main window Color Measurement sheet iPF6450 Deleting Execution Logs From Favorites Windows User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 879 ...

Страница 880: ...ter Note This step can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected 1 Select the execution log to save on the computer in Ex ecution Logs in the main window Color Measure ment sheet 2 Select Output Execution Log CSV Selected Logs from the Tools menu Note To save all of the execution logs select All Logs Saving Execution Logs on the Computer Windows iPF6450 Use...

Страница 881: ...lect the display units in the Units sheet in the Prefer ences dialog box and then click the OK button Getting Audio Notification of Color Calibration Finished Getting Audio Notification of Color Calibration Finished You can be notified by sound when color calibration finishes 1 Select Preferences from the File menu iPF6450 Switching Display Units Windows User s Guide Color Management Color Calibra...

Страница 882: ...k the Browse button and select the audio file Note If you want to check the sound in the selected audio file click the Test button 3 Click the OK button Getting Audio Notification of Color Calibration Finished Windows iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Windows 882 ...

Страница 883: ...easurement data and execute color checks on printers that have a spectrophotometer unit installed Display Color Calibration Status Execute Color Calibration Acquire Color Measurement Data Execute Color Check Display Color Calibration Status The printers connected via the network and USB are displayed in a list in the main window If there are multiple printers printers where color calibration has b...

Страница 884: ...cuted when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected Execute Color Check You can execute a color check When a color check is executed a built in pattern is printed the color difference from a calibration target registered in the printer is calculated and the check results are displayed Execute a color check when you want to check the color status of a printer in detail For ...

Страница 885: ... the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button 6 Click the Install button 7 Click the Continue button to close all other applica tions iPF6450 Installation Procedure Mac OS X User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 885 ...

Страница 886: ...llation Procedure The uninstallation procedure for the Color Calibration Management Console is as follows 1 Perform steps 1 through 5 of the installation procedure 2 Select Uninstall 3 Click the Uninstall button Uninstallation Procedure Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 886 ...

Страница 887: ...ays the Color Calibration Management Console main window Main Window Main Window The Color Calibration Management Console main window consists of a menu bar title bar Printer list Calibration sheet and Color Measurement sheet You can switch between the Calibration sheet and Color Measurement sheet by clicking the ACalibration tab or BColor Measurement tab You can also switch between the sheets fro...

Страница 888: ...ration Sheet is Displayed P 892 Tools Menu When the Color Measurement Sheet is Displayed P 892 You can switch between displaying and hiding the Color Calibration Management Console using the Window menu Clicking imagePROGRAF Color Calibration Management Console Help in the Help menu displays the Color Calibration Management Console help Main Window Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Co...

Страница 889: ...inter List Displays a list of printers that can be controlled For details see Printer List P 894 iPF6450 Main Window Mac OS X User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 889 ...

Страница 890: ...Sheet This sheet allows you to acquire color chart measurement data and execute color check For details see Color Measurement Sheet P 896 Note Enabled when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected Main Window Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 890 ...

Страница 891: ...e For details refer to the Mac OS X help Hide image Color Calibration Management Console Hide Others Show All Switches between displaying and hiding windows Quit imagePROGRAF Color Calibration Management Console Exits Color Calibration Management Console File Menu File Menu This section describes each of the menu items in the File menu Calibration Color Measurement Selects the main window sheet Up...

Страница 892: ...is selected the progress dialog box closes automatically Calibrated All Custom Paper Selects the paper types displayed in the main window Calibration sheet Paper Status Displays the Paper Status dialog box This allows you to check the color calibration and color check execution logs for the selected paper Update Refreshes the paper list in the main window with the latest information Tools Menu Whe...

Страница 893: ...tomatically when Color Check or Acquire Color Meas urement Data finishes When the check box is selected the progress dialog box closes automatically Favorites Displays the Favorites Management dialog box This allows you to check the execution logs registered in the favorites Log Details Displays the Execution Log Details dialog box This allows you to check the details of the execution log selected...

Страница 894: ... Calibration Management Console Printers where the printer driver is installed Printer If color calibration is executed on the paper being fed printers that are being fed the same paper are displayed under the Calibration group is displayed on printers that have a message related to color calibration is displayed on printers where the spectrophotometer unit is installed Double click the printer na...

Страница 895: ...or P 735 Calibration Sheet Calibration Sheet This sheet allows you to execute color calibration and check the color calibration status of the printer selected in the Printer list Paper Being Fed Displays the media type being fed in the printer Calibration button Click this button to display the Execute Color Calibration dialog box Executes color calibration on the selected printer For the procedur...

Страница 896: ... is selected Paper types registered in a printer are displayed When Custom Paper is selected Paper types other than genuine Canon paper and feed certified paper that are registered in a printer are dis played Color Measurement Sheet Color Measurement Sheet This sheet allows you to use the spectrophotometer unit to measure colors Color Measure button Click this button to display the procedure descr...

Страница 897: ...ta button Click this button to display the Output Color Measurement Data dialog box This saves the color measurement data from the selected execution log on the computer Favorites button Click this button to display the Favorites Management dialog box This allows you to check the execution logs registered in the favorites Log Details button Click this button to display the Execution Log Details di...

Страница 898: ...ere color calibration has been executed on that paper are displayed in the same calibration group 3 Check the color calibration status of the paper being fed in the upper part of the Calibration sheet 4 Select Calibrated and click the Update button Checking the Color Calibration Status Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 898 ...

Страница 899: ...eets in the Feed Slot P 557 Note If Adj Quality has not been executed even once on the paper you are using when you execute Auto Adjust High Precision execute Adj Quality in the control panel menu See Automatic Banding Adjustment P 804 3 If a spectrophotometer unit is mounted select the White Black Backing Plate color We recommend white See Switching the White Black Backing Plate Optional Color P ...

Страница 900: ...ion sheet 2 Select the printer you want to execute color calibration on from the Printer list 3 Click the Calibration button Executing Color Calibration Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 900 ...

Страница 901: ...Size You can select this setting when Auto Adjust High Precision is selected in Color Calibration Type We recommend Larger when you want to prioritize the color measurement precision Note Enabled when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected 5 Click the OK button 6 When the Execute Color Calibration dialog box is dis played check the details 7 Click the Execute button Colo...

Страница 902: ...74 Note This step can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected Getting the Printer Ready 1 Confirm whether the paper to be loaded can be used for acquiring color measurement data See Paper that can be used for acquiring color measurement data P 844 2 Load the paper See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Note If Ad...

Страница 903: ...et 2 Select the printer you want to measure the color chart on from the Printer list 3 Click the Color Measure button iPF6450 Acquiring Color Measurement Data For Any Color Chart Mac OS X User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 903 ...

Страница 904: ...r chart measurement using the setting values when executed previously select the execution log in the Favorites sheet or History sheet 6 Select the color chart configure the color chart print settings and then click Next Acquiring Color Measurement Data For Any Color Chart Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 904 ...

Страница 905: ... to cut the paper when Acquire Color Measurement Data finishes Print Labels Select this check box to print the color chart printing information 7 Configure the color measurement settings and drying settings and then click Next Setting Item Details Color Measurement Preferences Configures the pattern size to print the color charts and the drying settings for the printed color charts Choose Standard...

Страница 906: ... ing on the size selected in Pattern Size As the time increases the adhesion of the ink improves and the color tones become more stable Reduce Drying Time Selecting this check box reduces the drying time Once the time configured in the Color Measurement Env sheet in the Preferen ces dialog box has elapsed color measurement proceeds without performing any further drying with the ventilation fan Spe...

Страница 907: ...ime longer and the Airflow stronger compared with when Standard is selected because of the larg er distance between the ventilation fan and paper 8 The View Settings window is displayed Check the de tails of the settings and click the OK button Note Click the Add to Favorites button to display the Add to Favorites dialog box which allows you to add the setting details to favorites 9 The Output Col...

Страница 908: ...n target registered in the printer is calculated and the check results are displayed Note This step can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected When printing the color check adjustment pattern the calibration adjustment values are applied even if Use Adj Value is set to Disabled in the Control Panel menu See Color Calibration Using the Spectrophotometer U...

Страница 909: ...oading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Note If Adj Quality has not been executed even once on the paper you are using execute Adj Quality in the control panel menu See Automatic Banding Adjustment P 804 3 Select the White Black Backing Plate color See Switching the White Black Backing Plate Optional Color P 837 Note For the color of the White Black Backing Pla...

Страница 910: ...asurement sheet 2 Select the printer you want to execute color check on from the Printer list 3 Click the Color Check button Executing Color Check Mac OS X iPF6450 User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 910 ...

Страница 911: ... Executing Color Calibration P 899 5 Click the OK button 6 When the Execute Color Check dialog box is dis played check the details 7 Click the Execute button The color check is executed Note You can exit the color check in the middle by clicking the Cancel button However it may take some time to end 8 Check the results iPF6450 Executing Color Check Mac OS X User s Guide Color Management Color Cali...

Страница 912: ...alling the operation Note This step can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected You can register up to 30 execution logs in the favorites 1 Select the execution log to register in favorites in Exe cution Logs in the main window Color Measurement sheet 2 Click the Log Details button 3 Click the Add to Favorites button in the Execution Log Details dialog bo...

Страница 913: ...or Measurement sheet 2 Select execution log that you want to delete in Favor ites and click the Delete from Favorites button 3 Click the OK button Saving Execution Logs on the Computer Saving Execution Logs on the Computer You can save Acquire Color Measurement Data execution logs on the computer Note This step can be executed when a printer that has a spectrophotometer unit installed is selected ...

Страница 914: ... between millimeters and inches 1 Select Preferences in the imagePROGRAF Color Calibration Management Console menu 2 Select the display units in the Units sheet in the Prefer ences dialog box and then click the button Getting Audio Notification of Color Calibration Finished Getting Audio Notification of Color Calibration Finished You can be notified by sound when color calibration finishes 1 Selec...

Страница 915: ...ck the Browse button and select the audio file Note If you want to check the sound in the selected audio file click the Test button 3 Click the button iPF6450 Getting Audio Notification of Color Calibration Finished Mac OS X User s Guide Color Management Color Calibration Management Console Mac OS X 915 ...

Страница 916: ...iPF6450 User s Guide 916 ...

Страница 917: ...nter Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks 918 Printheads 927 Maintenance Cartridge 936 Cleaning the Printer 944 Other Maintenance 954 Consumables 972 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix 1039 Maintenance and Consumables 917 ...

Страница 918: ...umber Ink Type Capacity Matte black PFI 206 MBK Pigment ink 300 ml 10 2 fl oz Black PFI 206 BK Cyan PFI 206 C Magenta PFI 206 M Yellow PFI 206 Y Photo cyan PFI 206 PC Photo magenta PFI 206 PM Red PFI 206 R Green PFI 206 G Blue PFI 206 B Gray PFI 206 GY Photo gray PFI 206 PGY Note For instructions on Ink Tank replacement see Replacing Ink Tanks P 918 The provided Starter Ink Tanks contain 90 ml 3 0...

Страница 919: ...f you use older ink tanks Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods a month or more Residual ink may become clog ged inside the printer and affect printing quality Confirm the message When the ink level becomes low a message is displayed on the Display Screen According to the message replace the ink tank or prepare a new ink tank See When to Replace Ink Tanks P 925 ...

Страница 920: ...ton The Ink Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Rep Ink Tank and then press the OK button A message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover Remove the Ink Tank at this point Remove the Ink Tanks User s Guide HTML 1 Open the Ink Tank Cover and check the ink lamps Ink lamps flash when there is little ink left Replacing Ink Tanks iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumabl...

Страница 921: ...and remove it Press the OK button Important If there is still ink in the Ink Tank you removed store it with the ink holes a facing up Otherwise ink may leak and cause stains Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it Note Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations iPF6450 Replacing Ink Tanks User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks 921 ...

Страница 922: ...lling an ink tank do not remove and shake it Doing so may cause the ink to leak out If you do not agitate the Ink Tank the ink may settle which may affect printing quality 2 Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank Important Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts This may cause stains damage the Ink Tank and affect printing quality Replacing Ink Tanks iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and C...

Страница 923: ...a tion is incorrect If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder do not force it in Make sure that the color of the Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reinstalling it 4 Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever closed until it clicks into place iPF6450 Replacing Ink Tanks User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks 923 ...

Страница 924: ...ank Lock Lever come out of place If this happens open the Ink Tank Lock Lever to return it to the proper position 5 Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red Note If the Ink Lamp is not lit reinstall the tank 6 Close the Ink Tank Cover Replacing Ink Tanks iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks 924 ...

Страница 925: ...nk is low if no ink is left and if you have deactivated ink level detection The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank replace the Ink Tank If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large format printing or head cleaning check the remaining levels and repla...

Страница 926: ...ot of ink Replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen When ink runs out the Message Lamp flashes a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the Display Screen and printing is disabled Replace the Ink Tank at this point When to Replace Ink Tanks iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks 926 ...

Страница 927: ... check the nozzles Note Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check See Menu Settings P 663 Paper to Prepare When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254 0 mm 10 00 in wide When Using Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4 Letter size 1 Load paper Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 Loading Rolls in the Prin...

Страница 928: ... the Printhead may improve results Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B depending on the problem to resolve Head Cleaning A Use this mode if printing is faint or contains foreign substances This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink It takes about six minutes to complete Head Cleaning B Use this mode if no ink is ejected at all or if Head Clea...

Страница 929: ...f the printing quality does not improve even after one or two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu Replace any printheads with poor printing performance If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the left printhead Replace the Printhead on the left side If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the right printhead Replace the Printhead on the right side ...

Страница 930: ...aintenance cartridge 1 Remove any paper that has been advanced by selecting Eject Paper in the Control Panel menu When using a roll rewind it See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 540 When using sheets remove the sheet See Removing Sheets P 568 2 Clean inside the Top Cover See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 944 3 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Settings...

Страница 931: ...the Display Screen regard ing Printhead replacement 2 If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty use a damp cloth that you have wrung out complete ly to wipe it clean iPF6450 Replacing the Printhead User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Printheads 931 ...

Страница 932: ...em Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage This may damage the printer 3 Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely 4 Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely Replacing the Printhead iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Printheads 932 ...

Страница 933: ...ps a remove it from the pouch Important When handling the Printhead always hold it by the grips a Never touch the nozzles b or metal contacts c This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality Never touch the ink supply section d This may cause printing problems iPF6450 Replacing the Printhead User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Printheads 933 ...

Страница 934: ...ink accidentally spills wipe off the ink with a dry cloth If you need to put a Printhead somewhere temporarily before installation do not keep the nozzles and metal con tacts facing down If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged it may affect the printing quality Do not reattach the Protective Part or protective material Dispose of these materials in accordance with local regu lations 8 With th...

Страница 935: ... the Initial adjustmt of Head Posi Adj from the Control Panel menu See Adjustment When Installing the Printhead P 800 12 Follow the instructions on the Display Screen to advance the paper After the paper is advanced the Initial adjustmt of Head Posi Adj will be executed automatically Note When printing fine lines or text at high precision on glossy or semi glossy photo or proofing paper set the op...

Страница 936: ...enance Cartridge Caution For safety keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children If ink is accidentally ingested contact a physician immediately Important Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it Ink may leak out To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle Other wise ink may leak and cause s...

Страница 937: ... when ink is being absorbed Ink may leak out Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Re...

Страница 938: ...ag and packaging material Holding the handles a on both sides pull out the cartridge Important Never touch the metal contacts a This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge 2 Remove the Ejection Guide Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge 938 ...

Страница 939: ...he grip a Holding the cartridge by the handles b on both sides keep the cartridge level as you remove it Important Used Maintenance Cartridges are heavy Remove and store the used Maintenance Cartridge making sure to keep it secure and level If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it an angle ink may leak and cause stains The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is stored on each prin...

Страница 940: ...nance Cartridge and packaging mate rial in the box just as the new Maintenance Cartridge was originally packaged and store the used cartridge keeping it level Important Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a flat surface Otherwise ink may leak and cause stains Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance ...

Страница 941: ...ping it level 8 Hold the Ejection Guide on both sides by the near end Aligning the Ejection Guide with the guides a insert it into the printer until it locks in place Note If the Spectrophotometer Unit is mounted grasp the blue han dles on the left and right sides of the Spectrophotometer Eject Guide align the protruding parts of the Spectrophotometer Eject Guide a with the Spectrophotometer Unit ...

Страница 942: ...ve the printer check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge as needed See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 936 When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Di...

Страница 943: ...ement is shown on the Display Screen When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost empty the Message Lamp lights a message to replace the Maintenance Cartridge is displayed on the Display Screen and you cannot print Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one iPF6450 When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge 943 ...

Страница 944: ...nner If these substances come into contact with elec trical components inside the printer there is a risk of fire or electrical shock Important If the Ejection Guide is dirty it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty because it may actually be covered with paper dust 4 Plug the power cord into the outlet Cleani...

Страница 945: ...lly be covered with paper dust 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to se lect the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Clean Platen and then press the OK button A message on the Display Scr...

Страница 946: ...mplete ly wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it Wipe away any ink residue on the Platen a as a whole on the Pa per Retainer b Borderless Printing Ink Grooves c and blue Switch d Warning Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol benzene or thinner If these substances come into contact with elec trical components inside the printer there is a risk of fire or electrical shock Cleaning Inside the T...

Страница 947: ...irty after printing After printing on small paper Important During cleaning use paper that does not generate much cutting dust such as Plain Paper It may affect printing quality if you use film or other media that are more likely to generate debris when cut or that have a surface finish that may come off 1 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 23 2 Unplug the power cord from th...

Страница 948: ...parts as follows Cleaning the White Calibration Tile 1 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 23 2 Unplug the power cord from the outlet Caution Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance Accidentally leaving the print er on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer 3 Open the Spectrophotometer Unit Cover 4 Pres...

Страница 949: ...rophotometer Carriage and move it to the po sition shown in the diagram 7 Move the White Calibration Tile Holder in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the Up down Unit iPF6450 Cleaning the Spectrophotometer Unit option Parts User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Cleaning the Printer 949 ...

Страница 950: ... soft cloth If the white part is particularly dirty use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe the surface of the White Calibration Tile clean and use a dry cloth to dry the surface 10 Place the White Calibration Tile in the White Calibration Tile Holder and mount it in the position shown in the di agram while pushing down on the a part When installing the White Calibration Tile m...

Страница 951: ...wer cord before cleaning or maintenance Accidentally leaving the print er on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer 3 If the Up down Unit is lowered open the Spectropho tometer Unit Cover and lift up the central part near the blue label of the Up down Unit Important Lifting up the ends of the Up down Unit may cause damage iPF6450 Cleaning the Spectrophotometer Unit opt...

Страница 952: ... no dirt remains in the grooves on both ends of the Spectrophotometer Eject Guide If any dirt remains the printer may not be able to obtain the correct color measurement results Cleaning the Paper presser Dirt on the surface of the Paper presser may be transferred onto the paper or the White Black Backing Plate 1 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 23 2 Unplug the power cord ...

Страница 953: ...g Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol benzene or thinner If these substances come into contact with elec trical components inside the printer there is a risk of fire or electrical shock Important Do not press down strongly on the Paper presser Doing so may deform the Paper presser iPF6450 Cleaning the Spectrophotometer Unit option Parts User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Cleaning th...

Страница 954: ...ng out the ink are required Execute preparations for transporting when transporting the printer See Preparing to Transfer the Printer P 960 For details information on the operation see the Setup Guide included with the printer or options Carrying the Printer Removed From the Stand 1 Move the Locking Caster switch on the Stand to ON to lock the Stand 2 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer O...

Страница 955: ...t from the printer as needed See Removing and Attaching the Spectrophotometer Unit P 957 6 Remove the securing bolts using the Allen wrench 7 Remove the printer from the Stand and carry the printer iPF6450 Carrying the Printer User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance 955 ...

Страница 956: ...N to lock the Stand 2 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 23 3 Unplug the power cord from the outlet Caution Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance Accidentally leaving the print er on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer 4 Disconnect the power cord and interface cable from the printer 5 If you are u...

Страница 957: ...ctrophotometer Unit to the printer See Removing and Attaching the Spectrophotometer Unit P 957 9 Connect the power cord to the Power Supply Connector on the back of the printer 10 Connect the interface cable to the printer 11 Plug the power cord into the outlet 12 Connect the interface cable to the computer or network Removing and Attaching the Spectrophotometer Unit Removing the Spectrophotometer...

Страница 958: ...e Up down Unit is lowered open the Spectropho tometer Unit Cover and lift up the central part near the blue label of the Up down Unit Important Lifting up the ends of the Up down Unit may cause damage 5 Grasp the blue handles on the left and right sides of the Spectro photometer Eject Guide and remove the Spectrophotometer Eject Guide from the Spectrophotometer Unit 6 Remove the securing bolts usi...

Страница 959: ...it by the carrying handle with one hand and supporting the upper part of the spectrophotometer unit with the other hand The printer may be unsteady if you hold it in other locations which poses a risk of in jury from dropping the printer Attaching the Spectrophotometer Unit to the Stand 1 Attach the Spectrophotometer Unit to the Stand iPF6450 Carrying the Printer User s Guide Maintenance and Consu...

Страница 960: ... stains If it is necessary to tilt the printer in transit contact your Canon dealer Note Depending on the state of the printer part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer the printer that is when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer This work is not necessary when carrying the printer or moving it while mounted on the optional stand When carrying the printer a...

Страница 961: ...button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 4 Press or to select Prep MovePrinter and then press the OK button to display the confirmation screen 5 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Once preparations are finished a message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover Important If consumables must be replaced the message Consumables must be replaced Call for service is s...

Страница 962: ...ains 3 Close all ink tank lock levers and then close the Ink Tank Cover At this point ink is drawn out from inside the tubes Important Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge unless a replacement message appears Removing the Maintenance Cartridge while the ink is bring drawn in may cause the ink to leak out Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Ma...

Страница 963: ...plug the power cord once the power is turned off Unplugging the printer before it is off and moving it may cause damage If you accidentally unplug the printer before turning it off plug it in again reinstall the ink tank and perform the procedure again 2 Open the Top Cover 3 Pinch the Belt together insert it between the Belt Stop per and affix the Belt Stopper to the Carriage Shaft iPF6450 Prepari...

Страница 964: ... Top Cover 5 If any options are attached to the printer remove them from the printer and pack them 6 Tape down printer covers to secure them in the reverse order of tape removal during installation 7 Repack the Roll Holder Holder Stopper and printer in shipping materials and then package them in a shipping box Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other...

Страница 965: ... the printer firmware For details on downloading and updating the firmware visit the Canon website Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option The Spectrophotometer Sensor and White Calibration Tile of the Spectrophotometer Unit should have matching serial numbers Important Performing yearly...

Страница 966: ... Off P 23 2 Open the Spectrophotometer Unit Cover 3 Press down on the center near the blue label of the Up down Unit to lower the Up down Unit 4 Open the Up down Unit cover Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance 966 ...

Страница 967: ...po sition shown in the diagram 6 Open the Spectrophotometer Sensor Cover 7 Remove the Power Supply Connector and Mini USB Connector from the Spectrophotometer Sensor iPF6450 Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance 967 ...

Страница 968: ...n the correct color measurement results When handling the Spectrophotometer Sensor hold it by the blue part on the side 9 Move the White Calibration Tile Holder in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the Up down Unit Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance 968 ...

Страница 969: ...or measurement results Installing the Spectrophotometer Sensor and White Calibration Tile 1 Place the White Calibration Tile in the White Calibration Tile Holder and mount it in the position shown in the di agram while pushing down on the a part When installing the White Calibration Tile make sure it is facing the appropriate direction 2 Install the White Calibration Tile Holder on the Up down Uni...

Страница 970: ...the Power Supply Connector and Mini USB Connector to the Spectrophotometer Sensor 5 Close the Spectrophotometer Sensor Cover Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance 970 ...

Страница 971: ...the Up down Unit cover 7 Close the Spectrophotometer Unit Cover iPF6450 Replacing the Spectrophotometer Sensor of the Spectrophotometer Unit option User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance 971 ...

Страница 972: ...Consumables Consumables Ink Tanks 918 Printhead 927 Maintenance Cartridge 936 iPF6450 User s Guide Maintenance and Consumables Consumables 972 ...

Страница 973: ...tter Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions 974 Problems Regarding Paper 976 Printing does not start 985 The printer stops during a print job 986 Problems with the printing quality 987 Spectrophotometer Trouble Shooting 998 Cannot print over a network 999 Installation problems 1001 Other problems 1003 Error Message 1007 Spe...

Страница 974: ...erless printing See Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size P 98 See Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 104 See Borderless Printing at Actual Size P 91 I want to know the paper types that can be used in this printer Concerning the paper that can be used in this printer refer to the imagePROGRAF home page or the Paper Ref erence Guide See Types of Paper P 526 ...

Страница 975: ...ecks Using the Spectrophotometer Unit option P 835 If you are using paper that light passes through easily we recommend that you select white If a color is used for one paper type that is different from the color that was used the previous time it may have an effect on the color measurement result If I am using the Spectro photometer Unit can I measure the colors of any paper You might not be able...

Страница 976: ...Slot If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam as follows 1 Turn the printer off before removing the Roll Feed Unit from the printer See Removing the Roll Feed Unit P 553 2 Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot 3 Attach the Roll Feed Unit to the printer See Installing the Roll Feed Unit P 554 Remove scraps left in the Paper Feed Slo...

Страница 977: ...moving scraps from the paper feed slot after clearing jammed roll paper see Clearing Jammed Paper Paper Feed Slot P 976 1 Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover Use commercially availa ble scissors or the like to cut the paper of the loaded roll Caution When cutting paper be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer Note If it is difficult to perform operations from the front of the printer perform ...

Страница 978: ... 1 Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side 2 Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover After removing the paper make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer 3 Close the Top Cover Clearing Jammed Roll Paper iPF6450 User s Guide Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper 978 ...

Страница 979: ... in the printer If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot remove the roll feed unit and then clear the paper jam See Clearing Jammed Paper Paper Feed Slot P 976 Note If it is difficult to perform operations from the front of the printer perform operations from the back of the printer If the printer has a Spectrophotometer Unit option lowering the Up down Unit makes it easier to perform operat...

Страница 980: ...ised handle the central part near the blue label Handling the ends may cause damage 4 Press the OK button Clearing a Jammed Sheet Fed Manually Clearing a Jammed Sheet Fed Manually If a sheet you have fed manually becomes jammed Paper jam is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel Remove the jammed paper as follows 1 Press the OK button 2 Remove the jammed paper If paper is jammed inside t...

Страница 981: ...de 2 Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover After removing the paper make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer 3 Close the Top Cover iPF6450 Clearing a Jammed Sheet Fed Manually User s Guide Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper 981 ...

Страница 982: ...er is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot remove the roll feed unit and then clear the paper jam See Clearing Jammed Paper Paper Feed Slot P 976 Note If it is difficult to perform operations from the front of the printer perform operations from the back of the printer If the printer has a Spectrophotometer Unit option lowering the Up down Unit makes it easier to perform oper ations from the front o...

Страница 983: ... the back of the printer Remove the jammed paper from the back of the print er After removing the paper make sure there are no oth er scraps of paper in the printer 3 Press the OK button Cut sheets cannot be pulled out from the front paper feed slot Cut sheets cannot be pulled out from the front paper feed slot Cause Corrective Action You have loaded paper other than POP board Push the cut sheet f...

Страница 984: ...ng printed documents fall out at an angle In the Control Panel menu set Cutting Mode to Eject Hold documents after print ing as they are cut See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 546 Paper is not cut Paper is not cut Cause Corrective Action The printed document became caught on a foreign object by the Output Tray which lifted the document The Cutter passed under the paper Remove the foreig...

Страница 985: ...ified as Printer Setup Utility or Print Center in other versions of Mac OS X 2 Select the printer and then Resume Printer or Start Jobs in the Printers menu to restart the print job The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent Cause Corrective Action In the Control Panel menu Pause Print is On Set Pause Print to Off See Pausing P...

Страница 986: ... and Printing on Rolls P 25 The printer ejects blank unprinted paper The printer ejects blank unprinted paper Cause Corrective Action The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to straighten it The leading edge of rolls may be cut to straighten it if Trim Edge First is set to a value other than Off in the Control Panel menu See Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically P 551 The Printhe...

Страница 987: ...e the printer was left without ink tanks installed for some time ink has be come clogged in the ink supply system After the ink tanks have been installed for 24 hours run Head Cleaning B from the Control Panel See Cleaning the Printhead P 928 Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece of paper inside the Top Cover 1 Open the Top Cover and make sure the C...

Страница 988: ...hooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images P 801 When printing on paper 0 1 mm 0 004 in thick or less choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Weakest in the Control Panel menu If rubbing still occurs in the Control Panel menu use a higher Head Height setting See Adjusting the Vacuum Strength P 810 See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images P 801 If edges of the paper curl and become soiled when ...

Страница 989: ...4 You are using a paper that does not dry easily In the Control Panel menu set Roll DryingTime to at least 1 min See Menu Settings P 663 When paper that does not dry easily is used for printing it may curl during printing and touch the Output Tray In this case in the Control Panel menu complete the settings for Dry time and Area in Scan Wait Time However note that printing will now take longer See...

Страница 990: ...ifference in how colors are printed after Printhead replacement because of individual variation among printheads Execute color calibration See Color Calibration Using the Printer Sensor P 826 Printhead characteristics gradually change through repea ted use and colors may change Execute color calibration See Color Calibration Using the Printer Sensor P 826 Color may change slightly even on the same...

Страница 991: ... in Fast or Standard mode is faster and consumes less ink than in Highest quality or High modes but the printing quality is lower See Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 63 Color may be uneven between dark and light image areas Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is...

Страница 992: ...of VacuumStrngth See Adjusting the Vacuum Strength P 810 Close the blue Switch on the platen so that it matches the paper size See Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen P 992 Incorrect Printhead alignment value When printing fine lines or text at high precision on glossy or semi glossy photo or proofing paper set the optimal Printhead height before aligning the printhead See Enhancing Printing Qua...

Страница 993: ... Remove the Cleaning Brush a 4 Using the back of the Cleaning Brush move the first Switch to the side opposite iPF6450 Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen User s Guide Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality 993 ...

Страница 994: ...SO A1 ISO A2 or 20 x24 6 Using the back of the Cleaning Brush move the Switch to the side opposite corresponding to the size of the paper for printing In this case note that you will move the switch in the opposite direction from the direction in step 4 Note The Switch only moves number 1 and the number that matches the paper size Set all of the switches where the number does not match the paper s...

Страница 995: ...nd then execute Adjust Length See Adjusting the Feed Amount P 803 The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 See Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot P 557 Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loade...

Страница 996: ...in the printer 1 Press the Stop button and stop printing 2 Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again Incorrect Printhead alignment value When printing fine lines or text at high precision on glossy or semi glossy photo or proofing paper set the optimal Printhead height before aligning the printhead See Enhancing Printing Quality P 794 In the Control Panel menu use a low...

Страница 997: ... printing on A1 594 mm or A2 420 mm rolls attach the included Spacer for Borderless Printing to the Roll Holder See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 The paper selected for borderless printing at actual size was wider than the actual page size For borderless printing at actual size use roll paper that has the same width as the actual page size See Borderless Printing at Actual Size P 91 There...

Страница 998: ...rt Mac OS X P 902 The test pattern is damaged or dirty be cause the Printhead is set too low on the Control Panel menu Set Head Height to a higher value on the Control Panel menu See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images P 801 A Spectrophotometer Unit part is dirty Clean the White Calibration Tile White Black Backing Plate and Paper presser See Cleaning the Spectrophotometer Unit option...

Страница 999: ...ee Configuring the Communication Mode Manually P 725 Cannot print over a TCP IP network Cannot print over a TCP IP network Cause Corrective Action The printer s IP address is not configured correctly Make sure the printer s IP address is configured correctly See Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility P 727 See Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel P...

Страница 1000: ...AppleTalk or Bonjour networks Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks Cause Corrective Action The AppleTalk protocol is not ena bled on the printer Activate AppleTalk on the printer See Configuring the Printer s AppleTalk Network Settings P 722 The computer you are trying to print from is not configured correctly Make sure the computer s AppleTalk settings are configured correctly See Conf...

Страница 1001: ...tware CD ROM provided with the printer in the CD ROM drive 2 Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD ROM Open the OS X folder and double click iPF Driver Installer X 3 In the upper left menu choose Uninstall and then click Uninstall 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Wind...

Страница 1002: ...im agePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to start the wizard 2 In the wizard window click Delete and then click Next 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Removing Installed Printer Drivers iPF6450 User s Guide Troubleshooting Installation problems 1002 ...

Страница 1003: ...lowing sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer There is a sound of suction from the Platen To prevent paper from rising paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it Roll paper makes a fluttering sound during printing There may be a fluttering sound when large paper is advanced You suddenly hear the sound of cleaning operations At regular intervals for printer ma...

Страница 1004: ...ll be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied Ink level detection Ink tanks specified for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out during print ing which prevents printer damage See Ink Tanks P 918 This function will not work correctly if you use refill ink tanks As a result printing stops Thus before using refill ink tanks you must cancel the...

Страница 1005: ...r checking the message press the button 4 After checking the message press the button 5 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button 6 Check the message and press the button 7 Check the message and press the button iPF6450 Ink Level Detection User s Guide Troubleshooting Other problems 1005 ...

Страница 1006: ...age about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen After checking the message press the button 10 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Ink level detection is now released Ink Level Detection iPF6450 User s Guide Troubleshooting Other problems 1006 ...

Страница 1007: ...nts for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message Error Messages 1008 Messages regarding paper 1010 Messages regarding ink 1019 Messages regarding printing or adjustment 1021 Messages regarding printheads 1026 Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge 1028 Messages regarding the hard disk 1029 Other Messages 1031 Specificatio...

Страница 1008: ... represents a letter or number 1031 Excessive temperature or humidity 1022 Execute printhead cleaning 1027 File read error 1029 GARO Wxxxx x represents a number 1031 Hard disk error 1029 Hardware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number 1031 Ink insufficient 1019 Ink tank is empty 1020 Insufficient paper for job 1012 Mail box full Delete unwanted data 1029 Mail box full Now printing wit...

Страница 1009: ...rophotometer read error 1025 Spectrophotometer Sensor not mounted 1024 Spectrophotometer Unit Backing plate error 1024 Spectrophotometer Unit Calibration white tile error 1024 Spectrophotometer Unit cover open 1024 Spectrophotometer Unit eject guide not mounted 1024 Spectrophotometer Unit not connected 1024 Spectrophotometer up down unit cover open 1024 The following ink tanks cannot be recognized...

Страница 1010: ...tern for printer adjustment on several sheets but sheets of different types or sizes of pa per were used When printing a test pattern for adjustment use sheets of the same size and type of paper in the required quantity Press or to select Change Paper press the OK button and replace the pa per See Loading and Printing on Sheets P 28 The printer now starts printing the test pattern Press or to sele...

Страница 1011: ...n the printer and try printing again Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that matches the size setting in the printer driver as follows 1 Press or to select Change Paper and then press the OK button to stop print ing 2 Replace the loaded paper to match the settings in the printer driver and try printing again See Loading and Printing on Rolls P 25 See Loading and Printing on Sheets P 28 ...

Страница 1012: ...ve Action Paper has been loaded askew or warped paper has been loaded Press the OK button and reload the paper See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 See Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot P 557 If Not finished printing Finish printing re maining jobs is displayed on the Display Screen press the OK button Printing will resume starting from the page on which the error occurred If this error recurs aft...

Страница 1013: ...See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 Press or and select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing Roll printing is selected but manual paper is loaded Roll printing is selected but manual paper is loaded Cause Corrective Action A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is loaded Follow these steps to load and print on a roll 1 Press...

Страница 1014: ...stalled Press the Stop button and stop printing 1 Turn the printer off and install the Roll Feed Unit 2 Turn the printer on and resend the print job Manual printing is selected Manual printing is selected Cause Corrective Action You have attempted to print on a sheet but no sheet is loaded Press or to select Load Paper and then press the OK button Load a sheet and then print See Loading and Printi...

Страница 1015: ...ing from the page on which the error occurred Paper loaded askew Paper loaded askew Cause Corrective Action Paper loaded crooked was detected when the paper was advanced Press the OK button and reload the paper See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 See Loading Sheets in the Feed Slot P 557 If this error recurs after you reload the roll re move the Roll Holder from the printer push the roll firmly...

Страница 1016: ...printing Finish printing remaining jobs is shown on the Display Screen press the OK button Printing will resume starting from the page on which the error occurred See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 There is a foreign object by the Output Tray obstructing the Cut ter Unit 1 Lift the Top Cover and remove the foreign object 2 If Not finished printing Finish printing remaining jobs is shown on the...

Страница 1017: ...from the Printer P 540 See Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder P 542 2 Replace the paper with paper compatible for borderless printing See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 533 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 536 The printer now starts printing the print job For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing refer to the Paper Refer ence Guide See Paper Reference Guide Press...

Страница 1018: ... holder Cause Corrective Action Skew Check Lv on the Control Panel menu is set to something other than Off and the roll paper is not placed securely in the Roll Holder during loading Follow these steps to reload the roll 1 Press the OK button and remove the roll holder from the printer 2 Insert the roll firmly on the Roll Holder until it touches the flange See Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder P 53...

Страница 1019: ...maining ink indicator Press the OK button open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for the color that is out of ink See Replacing Ink Tanks P 918 Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected Check ink tank Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected Check ink tank Cause Corrective Action Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use refill ink tanks The refill...

Страница 1020: ...olor and direction Cause Corrective Action There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the printer Load the Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 918 There is a problem with the Ink Tank Replace it with a new Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 918 The following ink tanks cannot be recognized The following ink tanks cannot be recognized Cause Corrective Action An Ink Tank that is incompatible with ...

Страница 1021: ...ion white tile because it may be dirty 1025 Cannot execute this command Use other paper Cannot execute this command Use other paper Cause Corrective Action Paper compatible with color calibration is not loaded 1 Press the OK button to clear the error 2 Load paper that is compatible with color calibration See the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Reference Guide Always make sure the loaded paper matc...

Страница 1022: ...is displayed when all of the following are satisfied If Set Exec Guide is On in the Control Panel menu If the printer is loaded with a type of paper on which color calibration cannot be executed Execute Common calibration See Color Calibration Using the Printer Sen sor P 826 Set Set Exec Guide to Off on the Control Panel menu See Menu Structure P 657 Please commn calibrt using above paper Please c...

Страница 1023: ...the Blue Switch on the Platen P 992 Blue platen switch is dirty Blue platen switch is dirty Cause Corrective Action The blue Switch on the platen is dirty Open the Top Cover and clean the blue Switch on the platen See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 944 Move the blue platen switch No xx to the right xx represents a number Move the blue platen switch No xx to the right xx represents a number Cause ...

Страница 1024: ... Unit eject guide not mounted Cause Corrective Action The Spectrophotometer Eject Guide is installed incorrectly such as being installed askew or not pushed in all the way Make sure that the Spectrophotometer Eject Guide is loaded in the correct position push it in all the way and press the OK button There is a foreign object on the Spectrophotometer Eject Guide Remove the foreign object and press...

Страница 1025: ... Menu Structure P 657 Alternately it may be resolved by selecting Air Drying in Drying Method in the Color Measurement Preferences dialog box in the Color Calibration Management Console and selecting the Dry Separated Chart check box if it is off See Acquiring Color Measurement Data For Any Color Chart Windows P 866 See Acquiring Color Measurement Data For Any Color Chart Mac OS X P 902 The perfor...

Страница 1026: ...the right side Switch the Printhead used once in the left side to the left side Wrong x printhead x is L R or not displayed Wrong x printhead x is L R or not displayed Cause Corrective Action An incompatible Print head has been installed Open the Top Cover Replace the Printhead L with a new one if Printhead L is displayed and the Printhead R if Printhead R is displayed If neither left or right is ...

Страница 1027: ...and Printhead R See Replacing the Printhead P 929 Execute printhead cleaning Execute printhead cleaning Cause Corrective Action The Printhead noz zles are clogged Follow these steps to clean the Printhead 1 Stop printing by pressing or to select Stop Printing 2 Clean the Printhead See Cleaning the Printhead P 928 If the message is still displayed when printing replace the Printhead See Replacing t...

Страница 1028: ... can continue to print but prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for re placement is displayed No Maintenance Cartridge capacity No Maintenance Cartridge capacity Cause Corrective Action The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation After confirming that the printer has stopped operating replace the Maintenance Car tridge See Rep...

Страница 1029: ...pting Other Jobs P 757 Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes See Deleting Saved Jobs P 766 Mail box full Now printing without saving data Mail box full Now printing without saving data Cause Corrective Action No more space is available on the printer s hard disk so jobs are now printed without saving them Print jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk After printing this message is cle...

Страница 1030: ...nal Box See Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs P 757 Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes See Deleting Saved Jobs P 766 Mail box full Delete unwanted data iPF6450 User s Guide Error Message Messages regarding the hard disk 1030 ...

Страница 1031: ...or requiring service may have occurred Write down the error code and message turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer for assistance Hardware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number Hardware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number Cause Corrective Action The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job The paper was not advanced because the trailing edge...

Страница 1032: ...ware version Turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power and then resend the firmware If the message is displayed again contact your Canon dealer for assistance Calibration There is a problem with the multi sensor Calibration There is a problem with the multi sensor Cause Corrective Action The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be im paired Press the OK button and canc...

Страница 1033: ...aper 525 Control Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications Printer Specifications 1034 Spectrophotometer Unit Specifications 1038 Appendix 1039 Specifications 1033 ...

Страница 1034: ...t Approx 87 kg 191 8 lb Space for installation W D H 3 Printer only 1 527 1 802 644 mm 60 1 70 9 25 4 in Printer and Stand 1 527 1 851 1 301 mm 60 1 72 9 51 2 in Printer Stand and Spectropho tometer Unit 1 527 1 975 1 301 mm 60 1 77 8 51 2 in Applicable standards International Energy Star Program Eco Mark Japan Law on Promoting Green Purchasing Japan GPN RoHS Europe China The Eco Declaration Europ...

Страница 1035: ... IEEE 802 3ab 1000Base T Auto Negotiation IEEE 802 3x Full Duplex Protocols IPX SPX Netware 4 2 5 1 6 0 SNMP Canon MIB compatible HTTP TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 AppleTalk Ink For information on the ink the printer supports see Ink Tanks P 918 Paper For information on the types of paper the printer supports refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Reference Guide For information on the paper sizes the p...

Страница 1036: ... Area Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides Sheets Top Paper Feed Slot 3 mm 0 12 in 3 or 23 mm 0 12 or 0 91 in 3 mm 0 12 in 20 mm 0 79 in 23 mm 0 91 in 5 mm 0 20 in Front Paper Feed Slot 3 mm 0 12 in 23 mm 0 91 in 3 mm 0 12 in Rolls 0 or 3 mm 0 or 0 12 in 0 or 3 mm 0 or 0 12 in 0 or 3 mm 0 or 0 12 in 20 mm 0 79 in 5 mm 0 20 in 5 mm 0 20 in Sheets Printable Area Printing from the To...

Страница 1037: ...r printing However Manual 3mm margins is not available with the following paper Fine Art Photo Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Fine Art Textured Types of paper are subject to change For details on types of paper see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 526 Rolls Printable Area A margin of 3 mm 0 12 in on all sides is required During borderless printing the margin on all sides is 0 mm For info...

Страница 1038: ...ilter UV LED Measurement aperture Diameter 3 55 mm Spectral Output 31 points 400nm to 700nm 10nm gap Observer Angle 2 10 Illumination Type A C D50 D55 D65 D75 F2 F7 F8 F10 F11 F12 Measurement Range 0 to 150 reflection Repetition Accuracy Maximum dEcmc 0 2 White tile Maximum dEcmc 0 6 Black tile Instrument Error Average dEcmc 0 5 BCRA tile 12 color Max dEcmc 1 0 12 color BCRA tiles Recommended cali...

Страница 1039: ...Panel 643 Printer Parts 679 Network Setting 697 Print Job Management 731 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 793 Color Management 813 Maintenance and Consumables 917 Troubleshooting 973 Error Message 1007 Specifications 1033 Appendix Safety Precautions 1040 Manuals for this printer 1044 How to use this manual 1046 Disposal of the product 1054 Appendix 1039 ...

Страница 1040: ...inter or cause malfunction Power Supply Warning Never handle the power cable with wet hands Doing so may cause electrical shock Insert the power cable securely and completely into the power source If the power cable is not inserted completely this could cause a fire or electrical shock Do not use any power cable other than the one provided This could cause a fire or electrical shock Never use the ...

Страница 1041: ...he printer Moving the Printer Caution Moving the printer requires at least three people holding it on both sides and from behind Be careful to avoid back strain and other injuries When moving the printer firmly grasp the Carrying Handles under each side and in back The printer may be unsteady if you hold it at other positions which poses a risk of injury from dropping the printer Printhead Ink Tan...

Страница 1042: ...em in the room We recommend ensuring ample space for installation Legal Notices Legal Notices FCC Regulations U S A Canon Large Format Printer iPF6450 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This de vice may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interfer ence that may cause ...

Страница 1043: ...Macintosh is trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Other company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Copyright Unauthorized reproduction of this user manual in whole or part is prohibited Legal Notice It is illegal to reproduce currency bills negotiable securities and other documents prohibited by law Reprod...

Страница 1044: ...warning items for which operating error poses a risk of death or serious injury To ensure safe use always follow these warnings Caution Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury To ensure safe use always follow these cau tions Important Indicates important information and restrictions that definitely are to be followed during operation Be sure to read this informatio...

Страница 1045: ...iver help Figures and software screens Figures in this user manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some cases Screens depicted in this user manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from the actual screens because of subsequent updates May we request The information in this user manual is subject to change without notice We strive to ensure accu...

Страница 1046: ...ed to view the videos If it is not installed download it by clicking the following URL http www adobe com products flashplayer Note that this URL is subject to change If you cannot access this URL download Adobe Flash Player by visiting the main Adobe website and navigating to the appropriate page Searching Topics Searching Topics You can find information in topics of this User Manual by searching...

Страница 1047: ...The terms you searched for will be highlighted in the topic To review multiple topics at once select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply button iPF6450 Searching Topics User s Guide Appendix How to use this manual 1047 ...

Страница 1048: ...rinting Workflow as an example Printing a group of topics in the manual When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents you can specify a group of topics to print 1 Click a section title in the table of contents Here Basic Printing Workflow is used as an example 2 Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area HTML Version of the Manual ...

Страница 1049: ...Workflow are displayed together in HTML format ready for printing 3 Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button iPF6450 HTML Version of the Manual for Printing User s Guide Appendix How to use this manual 1049 ...

Страница 1050: ...cify a group of topics to print 1 Click a section title in the table of contents Here Basic Printing Workflow is used as an example 2 Under Basic Printing Workflow click Printing Proce dure 3 Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF6450 User s Guide Appendix How to use this manual 1050 ...

Страница 1051: ...cedure are displayed togeth er in HTML format ready for printing 4 Clear the topics you will not print and click the Apply button iPF6450 HTML Version of the Manual for Printing User s Guide Appendix How to use this manual 1051 ...

Страница 1052: ...ation area except on a figure or a link In the shortcut menu click Print to display the Print dialog box Macintosh On a Macintosh computer click anywhere in the explanation area except on a figure or a link while holding the Ctrl key In the shortcut menu click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF6450 User s Guide Appendix How to use this manual 10...

Страница 1053: ...nd then click Print Windows or Print Macintosh Windows Macintosh Note To print only individual topics that are displayed use this method iPF6450 HTML Version of the Manual for Printing User s Guide Appendix How to use this manual 1053 ...

Страница 1054: ...Disposal of the product Disposal of the product WEEE Directive WEEE Directive WEEE Directive iPF6450 User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1054 ...

Страница 1055: ...iPF6450 WEEE Directive User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1055 ...

Страница 1056: ...WEEE Directive iPF6450 User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1056 ...

Страница 1057: ...iPF6450 WEEE Directive User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1057 ...

Страница 1058: ...WEEE Directive iPF6450 User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1058 ...

Страница 1059: ...iPF6450 WEEE Directive User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1059 ...

Страница 1060: ...WEEE Directive iPF6450 User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1060 ...

Страница 1061: ...iPF6450 WEEE Directive User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1061 ...

Страница 1062: ...WEEE Directive iPF6450 User s Guide Appendix Disposal of the product 1062 ...

Страница 1063: ...68 Main Sheet 186 265 471 Maintenance Cartridge 936 942 1028 Menu Operations 653 654 Menu Structure 657 N Navigate 649 NetWare network 999 Nozzle 927 O Orientation 165 167 338 350 Output Method 202 Output Stacker Precautions 570 Oversize 86 P Page Setup Pane 382 Page Setup Sheet 199 268 474 Paper Feed Slot 683 976 Personal Box 776 779 PosterArtist 54 Power 339 341 343 346 347 348 350 Preparing to ...

Страница 1064: ...Strange Sound 1003 Support Pane 384 Support Sheet 209 274 479 U Using the Output Stacker 571 Utility Sheet 208 W Watermark 162 163 When to Replace Ink Tanks 925 1064 ...

Страница 1065: ...1065 ...

Страница 1066: ...Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A Canon Europe Ltd 3 The Square Stockley Park Uxbridge Middlesex UB11 1ET United Kingdom Canon China Co Ltd 15F Jinbao Building No 89 Jinbao Street Dongcheng District Beijing 100005 China Canon Australia Pty Ltd 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney N S W 2113 Australia CANON INC 2012 ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для imagePROGRAF iPF6450

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды